DocuPrint CM315 z

User Guide
 Adobe, Photoshop, and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows Vista, Windows, Windows Server, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, OS X, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Google, Google Chrome, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, Google Play, Android, and Gmail are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before
performing the required procedures.

It may be a legal offence to print currency notes, certificates of stocks and securities, or any other documents of similar
nature, regardless of whether they will be used.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking.

Important
1 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied or
modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2 Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4 Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized operation
can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the
equipment.
5 An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Xerox, Xerox and Design, Fuji Xerox and Design, as well as CentreWare are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Xerox Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
DocuPrint is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

2 User Guide
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the DocuPrint CM315 z.
This manual is intended for users who use the printer for the first time, and provides all the necessary operating
information about the print function.
Please read this manual to achieve the best performance from this printer.
This manual assumes you are familiar with computers and the basics of network operation and configuration.
After reading this manual, keep it safe and handy for future reference.
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

3
 Contents
Preface............................................................................................................................................................................................3
1 Before Beginning ......................................................................................................9
1.1 Types of Manuals...................................................................................................................................................................10
1.1.1 Manuals Included With the Printer ...................................................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2 Manuals Included With Optional Accessories.................................................................................................................. 10
1.2 About This Manual................................................................................................................................................................11
1.2.1 Organization .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
1.2.2 Conventions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Printer Overview......................................................................................................................................................................13
1.3.1 Front, Internal, and Rear View................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.3.2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) .................................................................................................................. 15
1.3.3 Operator Panel .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15

2 Setting Up the Printer.......................................................................................... 17

2.1 Attaching the Wireless LAN Adapter .............................................................................................................................18
2.2 Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line..............................................................................................................19
2.2.1 Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack ............................................................................................................................. 19
2.2.2 Connecting the Printer to a Modem..................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2.3 Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine............................................................................................................. 20
2.3 Turning On/Off the Printer .................................................................................................................................................21
2.3.1 Turning On the Printer................................................................................................................................................................ 21
2.3.2 Turning Off the Printer............................................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3.3 Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel................................................................................................................. 22
2.4 Connecting Your Printer to a Computer or Network ................................................................................................24
2.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.4.2 Connecting to a Wireless Network........................................................................................................................................ 25
2.4.3 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network ...................................................................................................................... 27
2.4.4 Connecting to a Computer With USB.................................................................................................................................. 28
2.4.5 Installing Software for Windows® ........................................................................................................................................ 28
2.4.6 Installing Software for Mac OS X .......................................................................................................................................... 31
2.4.7 Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) ...................................................................................................... 33
2.5 Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................34
2.5.1 Wi-Fi Direct..................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
2.5.2 Print Utility ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
2.5.3 AirPrint.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
2.5.4 Google Cloud Print ...................................................................................................................................................................... 37
2.5.5 Mopria Print Service.................................................................................................................................................................... 41
2.6 Setting the IP Address .........................................................................................................................................................42
2.6.1 Assigning the IP Settings to the Printer.............................................................................................................................. 42
2.6.2 Verifying the IP Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 43

3 Using Your Printer ................................................................................................. 44

3.1 Using the Operator Panel ...................................................................................................................................................45
3.1.1 About the Home Screen............................................................................................................................................................ 45
3.1.2 Basic Operations on the Touch Panel .................................................................................................................................. 47
3.1.3 Moving, Adding or Deleting Tiles .......................................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.4 Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel ....................................................................................................... 48
3.1.5 Changing the Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 48
3.1.6 Panel Lock ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
3.1.7 About the Concurrent Jobs Feature...................................................................................................................................... 49
3.2 Understanding the Menu Items on the Home Screen............................................................................................51

4 User Guide
 3.2.1 [Copy] ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.2 [ID Card Copy] .............................................................................................................................................................................. 53
3.2.3 [Fax]................................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
3.2.4 [Scan to Email].............................................................................................................................................................................. 57
3.2.5 [USB]................................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
3.2.6 [Scan to Network]........................................................................................................................................................................ 63
3.2.7 [Scan to WSD] ............................................................................................................................................................................... 65
3.2.8 [Scan to PC].................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
3.2.9 [Address Book] .............................................................................................................................................................................. 67
3.2.10 [Device]............................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
3.2.11 [Jobs]................................................................................................................................................................................................. 68
3.3 Understanding the Printer Menus...................................................................................................................................70
3.3.1 [Language] ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.3.2 [About] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
3.3.3 [Information Pages].................................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.3.4 [Trays]............................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
3.3.5 [Supplies]......................................................................................................................................................................................... 73
3.3.6 [Billing Meters].............................................................................................................................................................................. 73
3.3.7 [General].......................................................................................................................................................................................... 73
3.3.8 [Network Settings]....................................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.3.9 [App Defaults] ............................................................................................................................................................................... 86
3.3.10 [Security Settings] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 87
3.3.11 [Maintenance]............................................................................................................................................................................... 89
3.3.12 [Advanced Settings] ................................................................................................................................................................... 91
3.3.13 Resetting Defaults ....................................................................................................................................................................... 97
3.4 CentreWare Internet Services ...........................................................................................................................................99
3.4.1 Preparing to Use CentreWare Internet Services.............................................................................................................. 99
3.4.2 Starting CentreWare Internet Services ............................................................................................................................... 99
3.4.3 Managing Access to Printer Menus ....................................................................................................................................100
3.5 Reducing Power Consumption ....................................................................................................................................... 101
3.5.1 Entering the Power Saver Mode...........................................................................................................................................101
3.5.2 Changing the Elapsed Time Before the Printer Enters the Power Saver Mode .................................................101
3.6 Print Media Guidelines...................................................................................................................................................... 102
3.6.1 Supported Print Media.............................................................................................................................................................102
3.6.2 Supported Paper Weight.........................................................................................................................................................105
3.6.3 Recommended Print Media ...................................................................................................................................................105
3.6.4 Unacceptable Print Media .....................................................................................................................................................105
3.6.5 Print Media Storage Guidelines............................................................................................................................................106
3.7 Loading Print Media .......................................................................................................................................................... 107
3.7.1 Before Loading............................................................................................................................................................................107
3.7.2 Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder.......................................................................107
3.7.3 Loading Print Media in the Bypass Tray ...........................................................................................................................111
3.7.4 Loading Envelopes.....................................................................................................................................................................113
3.7.5 Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper.........................................................................................115
3.7.6 Linking Trays ................................................................................................................................................................................115
3.8 Loading Documents........................................................................................................................................................... 116
3.8.1 Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) .......................................................116
3.8.2 Loading a Document on the Document Glass...............................................................................................................117

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing .....................................................119

4.1 Printing.................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
4.1.1 Printing from a Computer.......................................................................................................................................................120
4.1.2 Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................................................................120
4.1.3 Stored Print...................................................................................................................................................................................121

Contents 5
 4.1.4 Printing From a USB Flash Drive ..........................................................................................................................................123
4.1.5 Changing the Print Settings ..................................................................................................................................................124
4.2 Copying................................................................................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.1 Making Copies From the Document Glass.......................................................................................................................125
4.2.2 Making Copies From the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) .............................................................125
4.2.3 Making ID Card Copies............................................................................................................................................................126
4.2.4 Changing the Default Copy Settings .................................................................................................................................127
4.3 Scanning................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
4.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................................128
4.3.2 Scanning From the Printer With a USB Connection (Scan to PC) ..........................................................................129
4.3.3 Scanning From the Printer With a Network Connection (Scan to WSD) .............................................................129
4.3.4 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD) .............................................131
4.3.5 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using the TWAIN Driver .........................................................................131
4.3.6 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver ..............132
4.3.7 Scanning From a Mac OS X Computer ..............................................................................................................................133
4.3.8 Scanning From a Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct.....................................................................................................133
4.3.9 Storing Scanned Data to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP (Scan to Network) .......................................134
4.3.10 Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) ..........................................................................138
4.3.11 Sending Scanned Data via E-mail (Scan to Email).......................................................................................................139
4.3.12 Managing the Scanner (Windows®)..................................................................................................................................141
4.3.13 Changing the Default Scan Settings..................................................................................................................................142
4.4 Faxing ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
4.4.1 Specifying the Fax Initial Settings......................................................................................................................................143
4.4.2 Changing the Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................................................143
4.4.3 Sending a Fax ..............................................................................................................................................................................144
4.4.4 Sending a Fax at a Specified Time (Delay Send)..........................................................................................................145
4.4.5 Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer (Direct Fax)................................................................................................146
4.4.6 Receiving a Fax ...........................................................................................................................................................................149
4.4.7 Reports Related to Fax .............................................................................................................................................................152
4.4.8 Changing the Default Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................................152

5 Know Your Printer................................................................................................154

5.1 Understanding the Software of Your Printer ........................................................................................................... 155
5.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................................155
5.1.2 Updating Software....................................................................................................................................................................156
5.2 Auditron.................................................................................................................................................................................. 157
5.3 Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization ....................................................................................................................... 158
5.3.1 Adding a New Tile .....................................................................................................................................................................158
5.4 Using the Address Book ................................................................................................................................................... 160
5.4.1 Address Features Available in the Address Book...........................................................................................................160
5.4.2 Registering Destinations in the Address Book ...............................................................................................................160
5.4.3 Specifying Destinations From the Address Book ..........................................................................................................163
5.4.4 Using the Address Book in an LDAP Server .....................................................................................................................164
5.5 Using Digital Certificates ................................................................................................................................................. 168
5.5.1 Managing Certificates .............................................................................................................................................................168
5.5.2 Setting the Features .................................................................................................................................................................171
5.6 Understanding Printer Messages ................................................................................................................................. 175

6 Maintaining Your Printer ..................................................................................184

6.1 Managing the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 185
6.1.1 Managing the Printer With CentreWare Internet Services .......................................................................................185
6.1.2 Checking the Printer Status With E-mail ..........................................................................................................................185
6.2 About Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................................... 188
6.2.1 Supplies..........................................................................................................................................................................................188

6 User Guide
 6.2.2 Checking the Status of Supplies ..........................................................................................................................................188
6.2.3 Ordering Supplies.......................................................................................................................................................................189
6.2.4 Storing Print Media ...................................................................................................................................................................189
6.2.5 Storing Consumables ...............................................................................................................................................................189
6.3 Replacing Consumables ................................................................................................................................................... 190
6.3.1 Replacing the Toner Cartridges ............................................................................................................................................190
6.3.2 Replacing the Drum Cartridges ............................................................................................................................................192
6.3.3 Replacing the Waste Toner Box............................................................................................................................................197
6.4 Cleaning the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 201
6.4.1 Cleaning Inside the Printer ....................................................................................................................................................201
6.4.2 Cleaning the Scanner ...............................................................................................................................................................210
6.4.3 Cleaning the DADF Feed Rollers and DADF Retard Pad .............................................................................................212
6.5 Moving the Printer.............................................................................................................................................................. 213
6.6 Removing the Wireless LAN Adapter and Optional Accessories...................................................................... 215
6.6.1 Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder ......................................................................................................................215
6.6.2 Removing the Cabinet .............................................................................................................................................................216
6.6.3 Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder and the Cabinet ....................................................................................218
6.6.4 Removing the Wireless LAN Adapter.................................................................................................................................222
6.7 Checking Page Counts ...................................................................................................................................................... 225
6.7.1 Counting up the Number of Pages .....................................................................................................................................225
6.7.2 Checking Billing Meters ...........................................................................................................................................................225

7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................226
7.1 Clearing Jams ....................................................................................................................................................................... 227
7.1.1 Identifying the Location of Paper Jams ...........................................................................................................................227
7.1.2 Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)..................................................228
7.1.3 Clearing Paper Jams From the Bypass Tray and Tray1...............................................................................................230
7.1.4 Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Rear Cover.........................................................................................................232
7.1.5 Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder......................................................................................236
7.2 Possible Problems and Solutions................................................................................................................................... 238
7.2.1 Basic Printer Problems..............................................................................................................................................................238
7.2.2 Display Problems........................................................................................................................................................................238
7.2.3 Printing Problems.......................................................................................................................................................................238
7.2.4 Print Quality Problems .............................................................................................................................................................240
7.2.5 Jam/Alignment Problems .......................................................................................................................................................253
7.2.6 Noise ...............................................................................................................................................................................................257
7.2.7 Copy Problems ............................................................................................................................................................................258
7.2.8 Scanning Problems....................................................................................................................................................................258
7.2.9 Fax Problems................................................................................................................................................................................260
7.2.10 Digital Certificate Problems...................................................................................................................................................262
7.2.11 Wireless Problems ......................................................................................................................................................................263
7.2.12 Wi-Fi Direct Problems ...............................................................................................................................................................264
7.2.13 Problems With Installed Optional 550-sheet feeder ...................................................................................................264
7.2.14 Scanner Driver/Printer Software Problems.......................................................................................................................265
7.2.15 Other Problems ...........................................................................................................................................................................265
7.3 Contacting Service.............................................................................................................................................................. 266
7.4 Getting Help.......................................................................................................................................................................... 267
7.4.1 Operator Panel Messages.......................................................................................................................................................267
7.4.2 Obtaining the Product Information ...................................................................................................................................267

Appendix.........................................................................................................................268
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................. 269
Basic Specifications/Copy Function .................................................................................................................................................269
Print Function ............................................................................................................................................................................................270

Contents 7
 Scan Function............................................................................................................................................................................................271
Fax Function...............................................................................................................................................................................................273
Direct Fax Function .................................................................................................................................................................................273
Duplex Function .......................................................................................................................................................................................274
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder ..............................................................................................................................................274
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder..................................................................................................................................................................275
Non-Genuine Mode...................................................................................................................................................................... 276
Contacting Fuji Xerox .................................................................................................................................................................. 277
Technical Support Policy........................................................................................................................................................................277
Online Services..........................................................................................................................................................................................277

8 User Guide
1 Before Beginning

1.1 Types of Manuals...........................................................................................................10

1.2 About This Manual........................................................................................................11
1.3 Printer Overview .............................................................................................................13

1 Before Beginning 9
 1.1 Types of Manuals
1.1.1 Manuals Included With the Printer
Safety Guide
Describes the information you need to know before using the printer and how to operate the printer safely.
Setup Guide
Describes step-by-step instructions on how to set up your printer.
User Guide (this manual)("Software/Product Manual" disc)
Describes how to get ready to print, copy, fax, and scan as well as set various features. It also covers the operator
panel menus, troubleshooting tips, and maintenance information.

1.1.2 Manuals Included With Optional Accessories

Optional accessories are available for this product. Optional accessories come with an installation guide that
provides procedures to set up the product.

10 User Guide
1.2 About This Manual
This manual is intended for first time users of the printer. It describes the basic operations for the copy, fax, scan,
and print features.
Note
• In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft® Windows® 7 and OS X 10.11 unless
stated otherwise.

1.2.1 Organization
This manual is organized into the following chapters.
1 Before Beginning (P.9)
Describes the basic information about the printer before operating features.
2 Setting Up the Printer (P.17)
Describes how to connect the printer to your computer and network, and how to install the software into your
computer.
3 Using Your Printer (P.44)
Describes information about screens on the printer or your computer, supported paper, and how to load paper
and documents.
4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing (P.119)
Describes how to use various features.
5 Know Your Printer (P.154)
Describes information about software and advanced features.
6 Maintaining Your Printer (P.184)
Describes how to maintain the printer such as cleaning the printer.
7 Troubleshooting (P.226)
Describes the troubleshooting tips for printer problems.
Appendix (P.268)
Describes the printer specifications and support information.

1.2.2 Conventions
– In this manual, "computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
– Please note that the screenshots shown in this manual apply to a fully configured printer and therefore
may not exactly represent the configuration being used.
– This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates important information you have to know or be reminded before

Important operations.

Indicates supplemental information useful for operations.

Note

Indicates reference sections or documents.

Refer

"" • A cross-reference included in this manual.

• Names of DVD-ROM, operator panel messages, and input text.

1 Before Beginning 11
 XXX Manual Indicates the names of the reference manuals.
[] • Screen names, buttons, or menus displayed on the operator panel screen.
• Buttons, menus, folders, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the
computer screen.
<> Indicates hardware buttons on the operator panel.
> Indicates a process flow.

– Orientation of documents or paper is described in this manual as follows:

Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation.
Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation.

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction

Paper feed direction

12 User Guide
1.3 Printer Overview
1.3.1 Front, Internal, and Rear View
Front View

1 2

9
3
8

4
7

1 Operator Panel* 6 Tray1

2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 7 Bypass Tray
3 Output Tray Extension 8 Front Cover
4 Right Side Cover 9 Front USB Port
5 Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)

*
You can adjust the angle of the operator panel as shown in the illustration.

Internal View

1 Before Beginning 13
 1 Toner Cartridges
2 Drum Cartridges
3 Waste Toner Box

Note
• Do not remove or insert the toner cartridges when the printer is in operation.

4
5

4 Retard Rollers
5 Paper Feed Rollers

Rear View

10
9
1
2
3
4
8
5

7 6

1 Wireless LAN Adapter 6 Kensington Lock Slot

2 Phone Connector 7 Power Connector
3 Wall Jack Connector 8 Duplex Unit
4 USB Port 9 Fusing Unit
5 Ethernet Port 10 Rear Cover

14 User Guide
1.3.2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

1 2
11 3
4
10 5

6
7
8
9

1 DADF Cover 7 Feeder Tray Extension

2 Document Guides 8 Document Stopper
3 DADF Chute Cover 9 Document Output Tray
4 DADF Glass 10 DADF Retard Pad
5 Document Glass 11 DADF Feed Rollers
6 Document Feeder Tray

Note
• Pull out the document stopper to prevent the document from falling off the printer.

1.3.3 Operator Panel

2
6 3

1 Touch Panel Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.

Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.

1 Before Beginning 15
 2 <Home> button Moves to the [Home] screen.
3 <Power> button Turns on/off the printer or switches the printer between two modes: standby
and power saver.
Refer
• For details about turning on/off the printer, see "Turning On/Off the
Printer (P.21)."
• For details about the power saver mode, see "Reducing Power
Consumption (P.101)."
4 Data LED Blinks when data is being sent or received.
Lights up when data is stored in the memory.
5 Status LED Blinks in blue when the printer receives an identification signal from a mobile
device.
Blinks in orange when an error occurs.
6 <NFC> Starts communication between the printer and a mobile device with the NFC
function when the device is tapped to or waved over the reader.
Note
• NFC detection may vary with device type.

Note
• Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to select
[OK] to save the current entry or setting.

16 User Guide
2 Setting Up the Printer

2.1 Attaching the Wireless LAN Adapter.....................................................................18

2.2 Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line .....................................................19
2.3 Turning On/Off the Printer .........................................................................................21
2.4 Connecting Your Printer to a Computer or Network ........................................24
2.5 Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices .........................................................34
2.6 Setting the IP Address .................................................................................................42

2 Setting Up the Printer 17

 2.1 Attaching the Wireless LAN Adapter
1. Turn off the printer.

2. Push down on the latch of the wireless adapter socket cover, and then remove the cover.

3. Insert the connector of the wireless LAN adapter to the wireless adapter socket.

18 User Guide
2.2 Connecting Your Printer to a
Telephone Line
Important
• Do not connect the printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you are
required to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.

2.2.1 Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack

To connect the printer to a telephone line, connect a telephone cable into the wall jack connector on the rear of
the printer. Connect the other end of the cable into an active wall jack.

To the wall jack

2.2.2 Connecting the Printer to a Modem

You can connect the printer to a computer with a modem on the same telephone line as the printer.

1. Make sure that the modem is connected to an active wall jack connector.
2. Connect a telephone cable into the phone connector on the modem.

2 Setting Up the Printer 19

 3. Connect the other end of the cord into the wall jack connector on the rear of the printer.

To an active
wall jack
Phone
connector

Wall jack connector

Note
• When using the fax function of the printer, turn off the fax-receive feature of the computer modem.
• Do not use the computer modem if the printer is sending or receiving a fax.
• To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax program.

2.2.3 Connecting a Telephone or Answering

Machine
If you share a telephone line with voice calls and fax, you can connect a telephone or an answering machine to
the printer to take the voice calls.

1. Make sure that a telephone line is connected to the printer.

Refer
• For details about how to connect to a telephone line, see "Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack (P.19)."
2. Connect a telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector on the rear of the
printer. Connect the other end of the cord into an external telephone or answering machine.

To an external telephone or
answering machine

20 User Guide
2.3 Turning On/Off the Printer
2.3.1 Turning On the Printer
Important
• Do not use extension cords or power strips.
• The printer should not be connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
• After turning on the printer for the first time, set the display language, date and time settings. For details, see "Setting
Initial Settings on the Operator Panel (P.22)."

1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then to an electrical
outlet.

2. Press the <Power> button on the operator panel.

2 Setting Up the Printer 21

 2.3.2 Turning Off the Printer
Important
• The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.

1. Press the <Power> button.

2. Tap [Power Off] on the touch panel.

Note
• Pressing and holding the <Power> button for three or more seconds can turn off the printer immediately.

2.3.3 Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

You need to set the display language, date and time settings before using the printer.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Device].

4. Tap [Language].
5. Tap the desired language.
6. Tap [General] > [Date & Time].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
7. Tap [Time Zone].
8. Tap your geographic region.
9. Tap your time zone, and then tap [OK].
10. Tap [Date].

22 User Guide
11. Tap the button at the lower left of the screen, and then tap the desired date format.
12. Specify the date.
To specify the month value, for example, tap the box for [Month], enter the desired value using the
keyboard, and then tap [OK].
13. Tap [Time].
14. Specify the time, and then tap [OK].
Initial settings are complete.

2 Setting Up the Printer 23

 2.4 Connecting Your Printer to a
Computer or Network
2.4.1 Overview
The printer supports wired and wireless connections. The following are the simple procedures recommended to
connect the printer to a computer or network.

Wireless connection

Necessary preparations
Check the settings of your access point or wireless router.

Windows® Mac OS X
Install software. Perform WPS-PBC settings install software.

"Installing With Quick Setup (P.28)" "Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network

(P.25)" "Installing Software for Mac OS X (P.31)"

Wired connection
(Ethernet or USB)

Necessary preparations
Connect an Ethernet cable or a USB cable into the port on the rear of the printer.

"Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.27)"

"Connecting to a Computer With USB (P.28)"

Windows® Mac OS X
Install software. Install software.

"Installing With Quick Setup (P.28)" "Installing Software for Mac OS X (P.31)"

24 User Guide
2.4.2 Connecting to a Wireless Network
Preparing to Use a Wireless Network
Perform the following procedures before configuring the wireless settings.

1. Make sure that the wireless LAN adapter is attached to the printer.
Refer
• For details, see "Attaching the Wireless LAN Adapter (P.18)."
2. Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable from the printer.

Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network

WPS-PBC and WPS-PIN are simple methods to set up wireless connection.
For WPS-PBC, perform WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel, and then press the button provided on your
access point or wireless router.
For WPS-PIN, enter the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer into the access point or wireless router.
These methods are available only when the access point or wireless router supports WPS.
Note
• Before starting WPS-PBC, check where the WPS button (button name may vary) is located on the access point or wireless
router.
• For details about the WPS operation on the access point or wireless router, see the manual supplied with the access point
or wireless router.

 WPS-PBC
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [WPS].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. When the message "Push WPS Button on router" is displayed, start the WPS-PBC operation on the
access point or wireless router within 2 minutes.
The printer restarts automatically to complete the wireless connection setting.

 WPS-PIN
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [WPS].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [Connect via PIN].
Note
• Write down the eight-digit PIN code displayed on the touch panel.
4. When the message "Operate wireless router." is displayed, enter the PIN code into the access point or
wireless router.
The printer restarts automatically to complete the wireless connection setting.

Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network

Connect to a wireless network using the SSID of your access point or wireless router. For details about the SSID
of your access point or wireless router, contact your network administrator.

2 Setting Up the Printer 25

  Auto SSID Setup
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].
The printer searches for access points or wireless routers on the wireless network.
4. Tap the desired access point or wireless router.
Note
• If the desired access point or wireless router does not appear, proceed to "Manual SSID Setup (P.26)."
• Some SSIDs are hidden and may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected, turn on SSID broadcast from the access
point or wireless router.
5. Enter the WEP key or passphrase.
• If the encryption type of the selected access point or wireless router is WEP:
a Enter the WEP key using the keyboard, and then tap [Next].
• If the encryption type of the selected access point or wireless router is WPA, WPA2, or Mixed:
a Enter the passphrase using the keyboard, and then tap [Next].
Note
• A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on your access point or wireless router. For details, see the
manual supplied with the access point or wireless router.
The printer restarts automatically to complete the wireless connection setting.

 Manual SSID Setup

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [Enter SSID].
4. Enter the SSID using the keyboard, and then tap [Next].
5. Select the network mode from [Infrastructure] and [Ad hoc] according to your environment, and then
tap [Next].
Note
• When [Wi-Fi Direct] is enabled, you cannot select [Ad hoc].
6. Select the encryption type from [No Encryption], [Mixed mode PSK], [WPA2-PSK-AES], or [WEP].
• If you do not set security for your wireless network:
a Tap [No Encryption].
• If you use [Mixed mode PSK] or [WPA2-PSK-AES] encryption:
a Tap [Mixed mode PSK] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
b Enter the passphrase using the keyboard, and then tap [Next].
• If you use [WEP] encryption:
a Tap [WEP].
b Enter the WEP key using the keyboard, and then tap [Next].
c Tap the desired transmit key, and then tap [Next].

26 User Guide
 Note
• A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on your access point or wireless router. For details, see the
manual supplied with the access point or wireless router.
• If you select [Ad hoc], [Mixed mode PSK] and [WPA2-PSK-AES] are not available.
The printer restarts automatically to complete the wireless connection setting.

Changing the Wireless Settings

To change the wireless settings of the printer from your computer, start CentreWare Internet Services. See
"Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
You can also set the same settings using the "Software/Product Manual" disc.

2.4.3 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network

To connect the printer to an Ethernet network, connect an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of
the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable into an Ethernet outlet or a hub.

Ethernet outlet/hub

2 Setting Up the Printer 27

 2.4.4 Connecting to a Computer With USB
To connect the printer directly to a computer, connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port on the rear
of the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
Important
• Do not connect the printer to a USB hub.
Note
• Make sure to match the USB symbol on the cable plug with the USB symbol on the printer.

2.4.5 Installing Software for Windows®

Note
• Make sure that the printer is connected to a computer or network before the installation. For details, see the following:
- "Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.25)"
- "Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.27)"
- "Connecting to a Computer With USB (P.28)"
• When installing in a computer connected to a network, make sure that [Turn on network discovery] is enabled in the
computer settings. For details about this setting, see the help of your computer.

Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL), PostScript 3

Compatible, and Scanner Drivers, and Fuji Xerox Common Print
Driver
 Installing With Quick Setup
You can use the printer installer to automatically install the following software:
• PCL driver
• Scanner driver
• Print & Scan Hub
Refer
• To install the PostScript 3 Compatible driver, Fuji Xerox Common Print Driver, and Address Book Editor, see "Installing
With Custom Install (P.29)."
• To install the XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver, see "Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver (P.30)."

28 User Guide
 1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.
Note
• You can also visit http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/ to download the latest software.
• If the "Software/Product Manual" disc does not start, perform the following.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Accessories] > [Run].
For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Run].
2 Enter "D:\Launcher.exe" ("D" is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click [OK].
2. Click [Quick Setup].

3. If you agree to the terms of the [License Agreement], select [I accept the terms of the license
agreement], and then click [Next].
The printer installer starts searching for your printer.
4. After the printer is found, click [Install], and then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the
setup.

 Installing With Custom Install

You can use the printer installer to select the desired software to install.

1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.

Note
• You can also visit http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/ to download the latest software.
• If the "Software/Product Manual" disc does not start, perform the following.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Accessories] > [Run].
For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Run].
2 Enter "D:\Launcher.exe" ("D" is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click [OK].
2. Click [Driver] or [Software].
If you select [Software], proceed to step 5.

2 Setting Up the Printer 29

 3. If you agree to the terms of the [License Agreement], select [I accept the terms of the license
agreement], and then click [Next].
4. Select the connection method you are using, and then click [Next].
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup.
Fuji Xerox Common Print Driver is supported and optimized on Windows® 8.1 or later.

Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver

Note
• XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on Windows Vista® or later.
• If you are using Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later, and then the
Windows® Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for download from Windows® Update.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.

 For Windows® 7:
1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.
2. Open the following folders in the disc: [Software] > [XPS] > [i386_amd64].
3. Open the desired language folder, and then extract the zip file in the folder to your desired location.
4. Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers] > [Add a printer].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes].
Note
• If you are logged on as an administrator on the computer, click [Yes]; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue
the desired action.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions until the [Install the printer driver] screen appears.
6. Click [Have Disk] > [Browse].
7. Select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 3, and then click [Open] > [OK].
8. Select your printer model from the list, and then click [Next].
9. Enter the printer name, and then click [Next].
10. Select either [Do not share this printer] or [Share this printer so that others on your network can find
and use it], and then click [Next].
11. When the driver installation is completed, click [Print a test page] to verify the installation.
12. Click [Finish].
 For Windows® 10:
1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.
2. Open the following folders in the disc: [Software] > [XPS] > [i386_amd64].
3. Open the desired language folder, and then extract the zip file in the folder to your desired location.
4. Right-click the Start button, and then click [Control Panel].
5. Click [Hardware and Sound] > [Devices and Printers] > [Add a printer].
6. Click [The printer that I want isn’t listed].
7. Select [Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings], and then click [Next].
8. Follow the on-screen instructions until the [Install the printer driver] screen appears.
9. Click [Have Disk] > [Browse].

30 User Guide
10. Select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 3, and then click [Open] > [OK].
11. Select your printer model from the list, and then click [Next].
12. Enter the printer name, and then click [Next].
13. When the driver installation is completed, click [Print a test page] to verify the installation.
14. Click [Finish].

Using Support Tools for a Setup Disk and Network Settings

You can use the printer installer to create the setup disk for drivers as well as specify the network settings. You
can access the following setting menus by clicking [Support Tools] on the top menu of the printer installer:
• [Create Driver Setup Disk]
Enables you to conveniently create driver installation settings. If you want to install drivers with the same
settings on multiple computers, create a setup disk in a media or in a server on the network. Using the
setup disk reduces the amount of work required when installing drivers.
Note
• Make sure that the setup disk must be created on the computer running the same operating system as the destination
computer you want to install drivers. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.
• [Configure the IP address settings.]
Enables you to specify the IP address settings.
Refer
• For details, see "Using the Printer Installer (Windows® Only) (P.42)."
• [Configure the wireless network settings.]
Enables you to specify the wireless settings.

2.4.6 Installing Software for Mac OS X

Installing Software
1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.
2. Open the following folders in the disc: [Software] > [MacSSW] > [MacOSX] > [Common].
3. Double-click the pkg file in the folder.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup.

Adding a Printer Using USB Connection

The following procedure uses OS X 10.11 as an example.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Connect the USB cable to the printer and your computer.
3. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Printers & Scanners].
4. Click the + (plus) sign, and then click [Default].
5. From the [Name] list, select your printer name for which [USB] is displayed in the [Kind] column.
6. From the [Use] drop-down list box, select a driver supported for the printer.
7. Click [Add].
8. Make sure that the printer is displayed in the [Printers & Scanners] dialog box.

2 Setting Up the Printer 31

 Adding a Printer Using IP Printing
The following procedure uses OS X 10.11 as an example.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Make sure that your computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured properly on your
computer and the printer.
3. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Printers & Scanners].
4. Click the + (plus) sign, and then click [IP].
5. Select [Line Printer Daemon - LPD] for [Protocol].
6. Enter the IP address for the printer in the [Address] area.
7. From the [Use] drop-down list box, select a driver supported for the printer.
8. Click [Add].
9. Specify the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer, and then click [OK].
10. Make sure that the printer is displayed in the [Printers & Scanners] dialog box.

Adding a Printer Using Bonjour

The following procedure uses OS X 10.11 as an example.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Make sure that your computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured properly on your
computer and the printer.
3. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Printers & Scanners].
4. Click the + (plus) sign, and then click [Default].
5. From the [Name] list, select your printer name for which [Bonjour] is displayed in the [Kind] column.
6. From the [Use] drop-down list box, select a driver supported for the printer.
7. Click [Add].
8. Specify the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer, and then click [OK].
9. Make sure that the printer is displayed in the [Printers & Scanners] dialog box.

Configuring With Optional Accessories

On the driver, specify the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer to enable features
associated with those accessories.

1. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Printers & Scanners].
2. Select the printer in the [Printers] list, and then click [Options & Supplies].
3. Click [Options], and then select the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer.
4. Click [OK].

32 User Guide
2.4.7 Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers
(CUPS)
Visit http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/ to download and install print drivers for Linux computers.

2 Setting Up the Printer 33

 2.5 Connecting Your Printer to Mobile
Devices
You can connect the printer directly to your mobile devices, such as computers, smartphones, and tablets, and
then you can print or scan documents, photos, web pages, or e-mails quickly and easily.

2.5.1 Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct allows your mobile devices to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct,
you can print documents, photos, or e-mails on your mobile devices directly without an access point or a wireless
router.
Note
• The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
• You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
• Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ
from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous
connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.
• The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols: LPD, Port9100, Web Services on Devices (WSD),
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, CentreWare Internet Services, TWAIN, Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA), and ICA.

Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct

To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the printer. To
connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, select the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless
networks on the mobile device and enter the passphrase necessary for connection.

 Setting Up the Printer

Note
• You can set the same setting using CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
• Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used in an IPv6 or Ad-hoc environment.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap for [Wi-Fi Direct] to display the check mark.
4. Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
5. Repeat steps 1 and 2 after the printer is restarted, and then tap [Group Role] > [Group Owner] >
[Paired Device].
6. Make sure that the number of mobile devices shown on the screen are two or less, and then tap .
Note
• When the number of connected devices reaches three, you cannot connect anther device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Disconnect all the devices from the network. For details, see "Disconnecting Mobile Devices From a Wi-Fi Direct Network
(P.36)."
7. Tap [SSID].
8. Enter the network name of your wireless network using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
9. Tap [Passphrase].

34 User Guide
10. Check what the passphrase is, and then tap .
Note
• To check the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping [Print Passphrase] under the
[Passphrase] menu.

 Connecting Mobile Devices to a Wi-Fi Direct Network

The following procedure uses Windows® 7, Windows® 10, OS X 10.11, iOS, and Android as examples.
For Windows® 7:
1. Click the network icon on the taskbar.
2. Click the printer's SSID > [Connect].
3. Enter the passphrase, and then click [OK].
4. Click [Cancel], and then exit the [Set Network Location] window.
For Windows® 10:
1. Click the Start button, and then click [Settings].
2. Click the Wi-Fi icon.
3. Click the printer's SSID > [Connect].
4. Enter the passphrase, and then click [Next].
For OS X 10.11:
1. Click the network icon on the Menu Bar.
2. Click the printer's SSID.
3. Enter the passphrase, and then click [Join].
For iOS:
1. Tap [Settings] > [Wi-Fi].
2. Tap the printer's SSID.
3. Enter the passphrase, and then tap [Join].
For Android:
The procedure varies depending on your mobile device. See the manual supplied with your mobile device.

Printing via Wi-Fi Direct

 Installing Software
Before printing, you are required to install the print driver or printing program accordingly.
For Windows® 7/Windows® 10:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device.
Refer
• For details about how to install the print driver, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.28)."
For OS X 10.11:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device.
Refer
• For details about how to install the print driver, see "Installing Software for Mac OS X (P.31)."

2 Setting Up the Printer 35

 For iOS:
You need to install the printing program from the App Store, and then the printer is ready for use.
Refer
• For details about the printing program, see "Print Utility (P.36)."
For Android:
You need to install the printing program from the Google Play store, and then the printer is ready for use.
Refer
• For details about the printing program, see "Print Utility (P.36)."
The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device. See the manual supplied with your mobile
device.

Disconnecting Mobile Devices From a Wi-Fi Direct Network

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Paired Device].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
• [Paired Device] is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.
3. Tap [Disconnect All].
4. Tap [Disconnect Now] or [Disconnect and Reset Passphrase] > [Yes].

Resetting the Passphrase

Note
• Resetting the passphrase disconnects the mobile device from the printer.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [Passphrase].
4. Tap [Reset Passphrase] > [Yes].

Resetting the PIN

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [WPS Setup].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [PIN Code] > [Reset PIN Code].

2.5.2 Print Utility

The Print Utility program allows you to scan to and print from your iOS or Android mobile device. For an Android
mobile device with the NFC function, you can tap the device onto the NFC reader of the printer to start printing,
scanning, and connecting to the printer.
For details, visit the following web sites:

36 User Guide
 • For iOS: http://www.fxap.com.sg/product/productDescription.jsp?id=166
• For Android: http://www.fxap.com.sg/product/productDescription.jsp?id=174

2.5.3 AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to print through a network with the mobile device running iOS or OS X. Make sure to
install the latest version of iOS for iOS device. For OS X, make sure to update OS X and the apps you
have purchased from the Mac App Store using the Software Update.

Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer

Note
• The AirPrint setting is activated by default.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.

2. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
3. Click the [Properties] tab > [AirPrint] on the left pane of the screen.
4. Select the [Enable AirPrint] check box.
5. Click [Apply], and then restart the printer.

Printing via AirPrint

The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS 8.1 as an example.

1. Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2. Tap the action icon .
3. Tap [Print].
4. Select the printer and set printer options.
5. Tap [Print].

2.5.4 Google Cloud Print

By registering the printer to your Google account, Google Cloud Print service allows you to print from various
mobile devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents, photos or e-mails using the Google Chrome
browser or programs such as Google Drive on your mobile device. For details about Google Cloud Print, visit the
Google web site.

Preparing to Use the Printer With Google Cloud Print

To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:
• Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet.
Note
• Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.
• If the printer is connected to a network via a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in [Proxy Server] from
CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
• Acquire a Google account and a Gmail address.

2 Setting Up the Printer 37

 • Enable Google Cloud Print on the operator panel.
1 Press the <Home> button.
2 Tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Protocol].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3 Tap for [Google Cloud Print] to display the check mark.
4 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.

Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service

Select the version of the Google Cloud Print service from either version 1.1 or version 2.0.
Google Cloud Print version 1.1 sends the print data to the printer via Internet. For this version, the printer needs
to be connected to the Internet.

Google Cloud Print version 2.0 sends the print data to the printer either via Internet or via local network. This
version is recommended for the environment where the Internet connection cannot be used.

Note
• Available options for printing may vary according to your device or the version of the Google Cloud Print service.
• You cannot simultaneously use both version 1.1 and version 2.0 of the Google Cloud Print service on a printer.

Registering the Printer to Your Google Account

 For Google Cloud Print Version 1.1
1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [Google Cloud Print] on the left pane of the screen > [Register This Device
to Google Cloud Print].
A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed.

38 User Guide
 3. From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google
account.
You can visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the printout into your web
browser or by scanning the QR code with your mobile device.
4. On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click [Finish printer registration].
5. Click [Manage your printers].
The printer is listed in the [Printers] list and ready for use with the Google Cloud Print service.

 For Google Cloud Print Version 2.0

1. Open the Google Chrome browser.
Note
• When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the Chromebook.
2. Click in the top right corner, and then select [Settings].
3. Click [Show advanced settings] in the bottom of the page.
4. Click [Google Cloud Print] > [Manage].
Note
• If a message is displayed under [New Devices] to sign in to Chrome, click [sign in] and sign in to Chrome.
5. Click [Register] for the printer you want to register.
Note
• If [Bonjour] is disabled, the newly added printer is not displayed in [New devices]. In this case, start CentreWare Internet
Services > click the [Properties] tab > [Port Status] on the left pane of the screen > select the [Enabled] check box for
[Bonjour].
6. When the window to confirm the registration appears, click [Register].
7. Follow the on-screen instruction on the printer.
8. When the printer name appears in the [My devices] list, the registration is completed.
Note
• It may take about 5 minutes or more until the printer name appears in the [My devices] list.

Sharing the Printer With the Google Cloud Print Service

You can share the printer registered for the Google Cloud Print service with other users.

1. Open the Google Chrome browser.

Note
• When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the Chromebook.
2. Click in the top right corner, and then select [Settings].
3. Click [Show advanced settings] in the bottom of the page.
4. Click [Google Cloud Print] > [Manage].
Note
• If a message is displayed to sign in to Chrome, click [sign in] and sign in to Chrome.
5. Click [Manage] for the printer you want to share.
6. Click [Google Cloud Print] > [Share].

2 Setting Up the Printer 39

 7. In the window to specify the printer sharing, enter the Google accounts of the users that you want to
invite to share the printer, and click [Share].
Note
• When the invited users log in to the Google Cloud Print web page, a message appears to show that the printer owner
made the sharing settings. Accept the sharing invitation.

Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [Google Cloud Print] on the left pane of the screen > [Cancel Registration].
3. Make sure that [Register This Device to Google Cloud Print] appears.

Printing via Google Cloud Print

The printing procedure varies depending on the program or the mobile device you are using. You can see the
program list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site.

 Printing From a Program on a Mobile Device

The following procedure uses the Google Drive program on an Android mobile device as an example.

1. Install the Google Drive program on your mobile device.

Note
• You can download the program from the Google Play store.
2. Start the Google Drive program on your mobile device.
3. Tap next to the file name of the file you want to print.
4. Tap [Print].
If [Print] is not displayed, tap , and then tap [Print].
5. Select a google cloud printer form the list.
6. Specify printer options, and then tap .

 Printing From Google Chrome

Note
• You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.
The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows® computer as an example.

1. Open the Google Chrome browser.

2. Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
3. Click or (varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in the top right corner,
and then click [Print].
4. In the [Destination] area, click [Change].
5. In the [Google Cloud Print] area, select the printer.
6. Click [Print].
 Printing From Google Chromebook
Note
• You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.

40 User Guide
 1. Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
2. Click in the top right corner, and then click [Print].
3. Confirm that your printer is specified in the [Destination] area. If not, click [Change] and select your
printer.
4. Click [Print].

2.5.5 Mopria Print Service

Mopria Print Service allows any Android phone or tablet (Android version 4.4 or later) to connect and print to
Mopria-certified printers without additional setup.
Firstly, download and install the Mopria Print Service app from the Google Play store to your Android mobile
device:
https://play.google.com/store/apps/
In order to print, connect your mobile device to the same network as the printer or use the Wi-Fi Direct
functionality to connect your mobile device to the printer.
Note
• Mopria Print Service might be preloaded in your mobile device. If your mobile device does not have the Mopria Print
Service, you can easily download it from the Google Play store. To learn more about Mopria Print Service, visit
http://www.mopria.org/.
• Make sure that [Mopria] is enabled in advance using CentreWare Internet Services. See "Setting Up Mopria Print Service
on Your Printer (P.41)."

Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer

1. Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
3. Click the [Properties] tab > [Mopria] on the left pane of the screen.
4. Click [Enable].

Printing via Mopria Print Service

1. Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2. Tap the menu, and then select [Print].
3. Tap [All printers] in the menu.
4. Select the printer, and then set printer options.
5. Tap [Print].

2 Setting Up the Printer 41

 2.6 Setting the IP Address
2.6.1 Assigning the IP Settings to the Printer
You need to assign an IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4 only), and gateway address to the printer before using
it in a network environment.
The printer offers IPv4, IPv6, and dual stack connectivity. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select the
dual stack mode.
Note
• Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
• IP addresses should be assigned by advanced users or system administrators.
• When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the printer installer or CentreWare Internet Services. For
details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."

Using the Printer Installer (Windows® Only)

1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.
2. Click [Support Tools].

3. Click [Configure the IP address settings.].

4. Follow the on-screen instructions until the [Configure Printer] screen appears.
5. Click [Advanced].
6. Specify the IP address settings, and then click [Next].
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup.

Using the Operator Panel

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Network Settings].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Perform either of the following:
• If the printer is connected to a wired network:
a Tap [Ethernet].
• If the printer is connected to a wireless network:

42 User Guide
 a Tap [Wi-Fi].
4. Tap [IP Mode] > [IPv4].
5. Tap [TCP/IP] > [IP Addressing].
6. Select how the IP address is assigned.
• To set the IP address automatically
a Tap [DHCP/AutoIP], [BOOTP], [RARP], or [DHCP], and then proceed to step 7.
• To set the IP address manually
a Tap [Manual Input].
b Tap [IP Address].
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.
c Enter the first octet of the IP address using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
The cursor moves to the next octet.
d Enter the rest of the octets, and then tap [OK].
e Tap [Subnet Mask].
f Enter the subnet mask address using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
g Tap [Gateway Address].
h Enter the gateway address using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
7. Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.

2.6.2 Verifying the IP Settings

You can check the settings by using the operator panel, or printing the System Settings report.

Using the Operator Panel

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [About].
3. Verify the IP address displayed in [IPv4] or [IPv6].

Using the System Settings Report

1. Print the System Settings report.
Refer
• For details about how to print the report, see "[Information Pages] (P.70)."
2. Verify that the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed under [Network
Settings] or [Network (Wireless)] in the report.
If the IP address shows "0.0.0.0," an IP address has not been assigned. See "Assigning the IP Settings to
the Printer (P.42)."

2 Setting Up the Printer 43

 3 Using Your Printer

3.1 Using the Operator Panel ...........................................................................................45

3.2 Understanding the Menu Items on the Home Screen ...................................51
3.3 Understanding the Printer Menus...........................................................................70
3.4 CentreWare Internet Services...................................................................................99
3.5 Reducing Power Consumption............................................................................... 101
3.6 Print Media Guidelines ............................................................................................. 102
3.7 Loading Print Media .................................................................................................. 107
3.8 Loading Documents .................................................................................................. 116

44 User Guide
3.1 Using the Operator Panel
The operator panel consists of a touch panel, status LED lights, a <Power> button, a <Home> button,
and a NFC tag. Use the touch panel to browse the various menus, and enter texts and numbers.
Refer
• For details about names of parts, see "Operator Panel (P.15)."
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
• If [Service Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."

3.1.1 About the Home Screen

This section describes the [Home] screen which is displayed by pressing the <Home> button. You can also
customize the [Home] screen to suit your preference or work style.
Refer
• For details about how to customize your [Home] screen, see "Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization (P.158)."

2 1 2 1

1. Widget Tiles
You can utilize the following widget tiles for maximum effectiveness.
Note
• If the tile is locked by the password, enter the password to enable the function, or contact your administrator to continue
the desired action. For details, see "[Security Settings] (P.87)."

[Copy]
You can specify the copy settings, and make copies.
Refer
• "[Copy] (P.51)"
• "Copying (P.125)"

[Fax]
You can specify the fax settings, and send faxes.
Refer
• "[Fax] (P.55)"
• "Faxing (P.143)"

[Scan to Email]
You can specify the scan settings, and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
Refer
• "[Scan to Email] (P.57)"
• "Sending Scanned Data via E-mail (Scan to Email) (P.139)"

3 Using Your Printer 45

 [ID Card Copy]
You can specify the ID card copy settings, and make ID card copies.
Refer
• "[ID Card Copy] (P.53)"
• "Making ID Card Copies (P.126)"

[Scan to Network]
You can specify the scan settings, and store the scanned data on a network server.
Refer
• "[Scan to Network] (P.63)"
• "Storing Scanned Data via Scan to Network (P.137)"

[Address Book]
You can organize the contact information.
Refer
• "[Address Book] (P.67)"
• "Using the Address Book (P.160)"

[Device]
You can specify the basic printer settings.
Refer
• "Understanding the Printer Menus (P.70)"

[Jobs]
You can check the job status or cancel active jobs. Also, you can print secured jobs.
Refer
• "[Jobs] (P.68)"

[Scan to PC]
You can send scanned data to a computer connected with a USB cable.
Refer
• "[Scan to PC] (P.65)"
• "Scanning From the Printer With a USB Connection (Scan to PC) (P.129)"

[USB]
You can directly save scanned data to a USB flash drive, and also print documents and photos stored in the
USB flash drive.
Refer
• "[USB] (P.59)"
• "Printing From a USB Flash Drive (P.123)"
• "Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) (P.138)"

[Scan to WSD]
You can send scanned data to a computer with Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Refer
• "[Scan to WSD] (P.65)"

2. Sidebar
Displays the toner status, error messages, network information, and Wi-Fi Direct information. You can also
open the [Jobs] menu by tapping , and open the [Device] menu by on the top right of the
screen.

46 User Guide
3.1.2 Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
Selecting the Item on the Screen
Tap the item.

Scrolling the Screen or the Listed Items

Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.

To scroll faster, flick the screen.

3.1.3 Moving, Adding or Deleting Tiles

Moving Tiles
1. Tap [Home ] > [Customize].
2. Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and then drag it to the desired place.
The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when you are dragging the
tile.

3. Tap [Done].

Adding Tiles
1. Tap [Home ] > [Customize].
2. Tap [Add] to select the tile you want to add to the [Home] screen.
3. Tap [Done].

Deleting Tiles
1. Tap [Home ] > [Customize].
2. Select the tile you want to delete, and then tap located in the top left corner of the tile.
3. Tap [Yes] > [Done].

3 Using Your Printer 47

 3.1.4 Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch
Panel
During operations, a keyboard sometimes appears.

You can enter the following characters:

Item Description
Entering alphabets To enter uppercase letters, tap . To return to the lowercase letters, tap
again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap .
Entering symbols Tap .
Entering a space Tap .
Deleting characters Tap to delete one character at a time.

Note
• If you want to change the keyboard language, change the display language on the operator panel. For details, see
"Changing the Language (P.48)."

3.1.5 Changing the Language

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Language].
3. Tap the desired language.

3.1.6 Panel Lock

The panel lock feature allows some printer settings to be kept in a locked state with the password so that
unauthorized personnel cannot access to the menu to change the settings.
Note
• Disabling some printer menus does not prevent access to the stored print and tray settings menus.

Enabling the Panel Lock

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Security Settings] > [Panel Lock].
3. Tap to display the check mark.
4. Enter a four-digit password using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].

48 User Guide
 5. Re-enter the password, and then tap [OK].
Important
• Make sure not to forget the password. If you forget the password, the following procedure allows you to reset the
password. However, the settings for the address book will be reset as well.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 While holding down the <Home> button, turn on the printer.

Changing the Panel Lock Password

Note
• You can change the password only when [Panel Lock] is enabled.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [Security Settings] > [Panel Lock] > [Change Passcode].
3. Enter the current password, and then tap [OK].
4. Enter the new password, and then tap [OK].
5. Re-enter the password, and then tap [OK].

Disabling the Panel Lock

Note
• [Service Lock] and/or [Secure Fax Receive] must be disabled before disabling the Panel Lock. For details, see "[Service
Lock] (P.87)" and "[Secure Fax Receive] (P.88)."

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [Security Settings] > [Panel Lock].
3. Enter the password.
4. Tap to hide the check mark.
5. Enter the current password, and then tap [OK].

3.1.7 About the Concurrent Jobs Feature

This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done by temporarily
displaying the [Home] screen and switching to a different function that can be run concurrently such as copy or
scan.

1. While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Copy], [Scan to Network], [Scan to PC], or [Scan to WSD].

3 Using Your Printer 49

 3. Change the copy or scan settings.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "Copying (P.125)" or "Scanning (P.128)."
4. Tap [OK].

50 User Guide
3.2 Understanding the Menu Items on
the Home Screen
3.2.1 [Copy]
You can select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Copy] tile.

[Quantity] Specifies the number of copies.

[Output Color] Selects color, or black and white copying.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[Copy] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Adjusts the density to make the copy darker or lighter.

▌[Copy] > >

[Reduce/Enlarge]
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
Note
• You can also specify the value in increments of 1% from 25 to 400 by selecting the ratio in the list, tapping + or -, or
entering a value using the number pad. See the following table for specific zoom ratios.

Copy A5 B5 A4
Original

A5 100% 122% 141%

B5 81% 100% 115%

A4 70% 86% 100%

▌[Copy] > >

[Paper Trays]
Selects a paper feed tray.

3 Using Your Printer 51

 [Bypass] When [Use Driver Setting] is enabled, "-" is displayed for [Paper
Size] and [Paper Type]. In this case, select [Bypass] to specify the
desired paper size and type. If you start the copy job without
specifying the paper size and type, [A4] or [Letter] is selected as
the paper size and [Plain] is selected as the paper type.
[Paper Size] Specifies the paper size.
[Paper Type] Specifies the paper type.
[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

▌[Copy] > >

[2-Sided]
Specifies the duplex copy settings and select the binding position.

[1?1 Sided] Copies one-sided documents into one-sided printouts.

[1?2 Sided] Copies one-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Before starting the
copy, you need to specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or
short edge.
[2?1 Sided] Copies two-sided documents into one-sided printouts. Before starting the
copy, you need to specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or
short edge.
[2?2 Sided] Copies two-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Before starting the
copy, you need to specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or
short edge.

▌[Copy] > >

[2-Up]
Prints every two pages of documents to fit onto one sheet of paper.

[Off]
[Auto] Automatically adjusts to fit onto one sheet of paper.
[Manual] Specifies the reduce/enlarge ratio in [Reduce/Enlarge].

▌[Copy] > >

[Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer.

▌[Copy] > >

[Original Size]
Specifies the document size.
Note
• When [Auto] is selected, the printer assumes the document size based on the size of print media loaded in the selected
tray.

▌[Copy] > >

[Original Type]
Improves the image quality by selecting the type of the document.

52 User Guide
▌[Copy] > >
[Collation]
Sorts the copy job accordingly. For example, if you make two copies of three-page document, one complete set
of three-page document is printed one by one. You can also automatically sort a copy job only when you use the
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).

▌[Copy] > >

[Saturation]
Specifies the vividness of color. A vivid strong color has a high saturation and a sickly pastel color has a low
saturation.

▌[Copy] > >

[Background Suppression]
Detects the background density of the original, and suppresses it to enhance the copied image.

▌[Copy] > >

[Edge Erase]
Removes the shadows of the top and bottom edges, or/and the left and right edges on a copied image, as well
as the shadow in the center of the image if it is a bound document or a booklet. You can also individually specify
the setting values.

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Copy ].

▌[Copy] > [Copy ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[Copy] > [Copy ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[Copy] > [Copy ]>

[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.2 [ID Card Copy]

You can select the following options to specify the desired settings.

3 Using Your Printer 53

 Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [ID Card Copy] tile.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Quantity]
Refer
• For details, see "[Quantity] (P.51)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Output Color]
Refer
• For details, see "[Output Color] (P.51)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Refer
• For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.51)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Paper Trays]
Refer
• For details, see "[Paper Trays] (P.51)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Sharpness]
Refer
• For details, see "[Sharpness] (P.52)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Background Suppression]
Refer
• For details, see "[Background Suppression] (P.53)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > >

[Saturation]
Refer
• For details, see "[Saturation] (P.53)."

54 User Guide
Resetting or Saving the Settings
To reset or save the menu settings, tap [ID Card Copy ].

▌[ID Card Copy] > [ID Card Copy ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[ID Card Copy] > [ID Card Copy ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[ID Card Copy] > [ID Card Copy ]>

[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.3 [Fax]
You can select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Fax] tile.
Note
• Before using the fax function, make sure to specify a country code by tapping [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] >
[Country/Region]. After specifying the country code, restart the printer accordingly.
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

[Enter Fax Number] Enters the fax number of the recipient.

Selects a fax number from the address book.
Selects a fax number from the dialed numbers.
Adds a pause symbol "-" to the fax number. If you tap and hold , a wait
symbol "=" is added to the fax number. The wait symbol "=" instructs the
printer to wait until it hears a dial tone before dialing.
Sends or receives faxes manually using the on-hook dial feature.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[Fax] > >

[Broadcast Fax]
Simultaneously sends a fax to multiple numbers.

▌[Fax] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Adjusts the density to make the fax darker or lighter.

3 Using Your Printer 55

 ▌[Fax] > >
[2-Sided Scanning]
Specifies the duplex scan settings and select the binding position.

▌[Fax] > >

[Resolution]
Specifies the scan resolution to improve the output quality.

[Standard] Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

[Fine] Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines, or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
[Superfine] Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The superfine mode
is enabled only if the remote fax machine also supports the superfine mode.*
[Photo] Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

*
Data scanned in the superfine mode is transmitted at the highest resolution supported by the remote fax machine.

▌[Fax] > >

[Cover Sheet]
Attaches a cover page to faxes.

▌[Fax] > >

[Polling Receive]
Retrieves faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.

▌[Fax] > >

[Delay Send]
Specifies the time to send a fax at a later time.
Note
• A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored.

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Fax ].

▌[Fax] > [Fax ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[Fax] > [Fax ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
• If the number of registered fax destinations is more than 30, it is not available.

56 User Guide
▌[Fax] > [Fax ]>
[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
• If the number of registered fax destinations is more than 30, it is not available.

3.2.4 [Scan to Email]

You can send the scanned data by e-mail. Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Scan to Email] tile.
Note
• You need to specify the SMTP server address in advance. For details, see "Sending Scanned Data via E-mail (Scan to
Email) (P.139)."

[Enter Email Address] Enters the e-mail address of the recipient.

Selects an e-mail address from the address book.
Selects a file format from PDF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF, JPEG, or XDW.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Output Color]
Selects a color mode from color, black and white, or grayscale.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Resolution]
Selects a scan resolution from 200, 300, 400, or 600 dpi.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[2-Sided Scanning]
Specifies the duplex scan settings and selects the binding position.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Adjusts the density to make the scanned data darker or lighter.

3 Using Your Printer 57

 ▌[Scan to Email] > >
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness to make the scanned data sharper or softer.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast of the scanned data. Higher contrast makes the colors darker, and lower contrast makes the
colors lighter than the original.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Background Suppression]
Detects the background density of the original, and suppresses it to enhance the scanned image.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Original Size]
Specifies the document size.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[File Name]
Specifies the file name of the scanned data.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[Edge Erase]
Removes the shadows of the top and bottom edges, or/and the left and right edges on a copied image, as well
as the shadow in the center of the image if it is a bound document or a booklet. You can also individually specify
the setting values.

▌[Scan to Email] > >

[From]
Specifies the email address of the sender.

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Scan to Email ].

▌[Scan to Email] > [Scan to Email ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[Scan to Email] > [Scan to Email ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, "Panel Lock (P.48)."

58 User Guide
▌[Scan to Email] > [Scan to Email ]>
[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.5 [USB]
You can specify documents or photos stored in a USB flash drive to print. Also, you can scan data to store as an
image in a USB flash drive. Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [USB] tile.
Note
• This feature is available only when a USB flash drive is inserted in the front USB port.

▌[USB] >

[Scan to USB Drive]

Selects a file format and stores scanned data in a USB flash drive.

Selects a folder to store scanned data.

[File Format] Selects a file format from PDF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF, JPEG, or XDW.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Output Color]
Refer
• For details, see "[Output Color] (P.57)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Resolution]
Refer
• For details, see "[Resolution] (P.57)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[2-Sided Scanning]
Refer
• For details, see "[2-Sided Scanning] (P.57)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Refer
• For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.57)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Sharpness]
Refer
• For details, see "[Sharpness] (P.58)."

3 Using Your Printer 59

 ▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >
[Contrast]
Refer
• For details, see "[Contrast] (P.58)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Background Suppression]
Refer
• For details, see "[Background Suppression] (P.58)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Original Size]
Refer
• For details, see "[Original Size] (P.58)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Add Folder]
Creates a new folder to store scanned data.

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[File Name]
Refer
• For details, see "[File Name] (P.58)."

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive] > >

[Edge Erase]
Refer
• For details, see "[Edge Erase] (P.58)."

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Scan to USB Drive ].

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[USB] > [Scan to USB Drive ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[USB] >

[PDF/TIFF Print]
Selects a file in a USB flash drive.

Returns to the screen listing the files.

[Black] [Color] Selects a color mode.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

60 User Guide
▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >
[Quantity]
Specifies the number of printouts.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[Paper Trays]
Selects a paper feed tray.

[Bypass] When [Use Driver Setting] is enabled, "-" is displayed for [Paper
Size] and [Paper Type]. In this case, select [Bypass] to specify the
desired paper size and type. If you start the print job without
specifying the paper size and type, [A4] or [Letter] is selected as
the paper size and [Plain] is selected as the paper type.
[Paper Size] Specifies the paper size.
[Paper Type] Specifies the paper type.
[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies the duplex print settings and select the binding position.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[Layout]
Specifies the output layout. Select whether to print one, two, or four pages on one side of a sheet of print media.
If you select [Off (No Scaling)], the parts that do not fit are not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[PDF Password]
Enters the password when you open a PDF file secured with password.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[Image Type]
Selects the print image quality.

[Auto] Prints PDF/TIFF files in the [Text] mode and JPEG files in the [Photos
(Standard Quality)] mode.
[Photos (Standard Quality)] Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.
[Photos (High Quality)] Prints the photographic images at the high quality.
[Text] Prints the text document at the standard quality.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print] > >

[Collation]
Sorts the print job accordingly.

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [PDF/TIFF Print ].

3 Using Your Printer 61

 ▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print ]>
[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[USB] > [PDF/TIFF Print ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[USB] >

[Photo Print (JPEG)]

Selects a JPEG file in a USB flash drive, and then specifies the color mode.

Selects all photos in a folder.

Deselects all photos in a folder.
[Black] [Color] Selects a color mode.
Returns to the screen listing the files.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[Quantity]
Refer
• For details, see "[Quantity] (P.61)."

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[Layout]
Refer
• For details, see "[Layout] (P.61)."

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[Paper Trays]
Refer
• For details, see "[Paper Trays] (P.61)."

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[2-Sided Printing]
Refer
• For details, see "[2-Sided Printing] (P.61)."

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[Collation]
Refer
• For details, see "[Collation] (P.61)."

▌[USB] > [Photo Print] > >

[Image Type]
Refer
• For details, see "[Image Type] (P.61)."

62 User Guide
Resetting or Saving the Settings
To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Photo Print ].

▌[USB] > [Photo Print ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[USB] > [Photo Print ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.6 [Scan to Network]

You can store the scanned data on a network server. Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Scan to Network] tile.
Select a network server to store the data.
Note
• You need to specify the server address in advance. For details, see "Storing Scanned Data to a Computer or Server With
SMB/FTP (Scan to Network) (P.134)."

Selects an FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol address from
the server address book.
Displays the information of the registered network address.
[File Format] Selects a file format from PDF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF, JPEG, or XDW.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Output Color]
Refer
• For details, see "[Output Color] (P.57)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Resolution]
Refer
• For details, see "[Resolution] (P.57)."

3 Using Your Printer 63

 ▌[Scan to Network] > >
[2-Sided Scanning]
Refer
• For details, see "[2-Sided Scanning] (P.57)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Refer
• For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.57)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Sharpness]
Refer
• For details, see "[Sharpness] (P.58)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Contrast]
Refer
• For details, see "[Contrast] (P.58)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Background Suppression]
Refer
• For details, see "[Background Suppression] (P.58)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Original Size]
Refer
• For details, see "[Original Size] (P.58)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Add Folder]
Refer
• For details, see "[Add Folder] (P.60)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[File Name]
Refer
• For details, see "[File Name] (P.58)."

▌[Scan to Network] > >

[Edge Erase]
Refer
• For details, see "[Edge Erase] (P.58)."

Resetting or Saving the Settings

To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Scan to Network ].

64 User Guide
▌[Scan to Network] > [Scan to Network ]>
[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[Scan to Network] > [Scan to Network ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[Scan to Network] > [Scan to Network ]>

[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.7 [Scan to WSD]

You can send the scanned data to a computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD). Select the following
options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Scan to WSD] tile.

[Select Destination] Selects a destination computer.

[Event] Selects a type of feature to send the scanned data.

3.2.8 [Scan to PC]

You can store the scanned data on a computer. Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Scan to PC] tile.
Note
• Make sure that the printer is connected to a computer with a USB cable.
• This feature is available when the operating system of the client computer is Windows Vista® SP2 or later.

[File Format] Selects a file format from PDF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF, JPEG, or XDW.

Displaying More Options

To display more setting options, tap .

3 Using Your Printer 65

 ▌Scan to PC > >
[Output Color]
Refer
• For details, see "[Output Color] (P.57)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Resolution]
Refer
• For details, see "[Resolution] (P.57)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[2-Sided Scanning]
Refer
• For details, see "[2-Sided Scanning] (P.57)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Lighten/Darken]
Refer
• For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.57)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Sharpness]
Refer
• For details, see "[Sharpness] (P.58)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Contrast]
Refer
• For details, see "[Contrast] (P.58)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Background Suppression]
Refer
• For details, see "[Background Suppression] (P.58)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Original Size]
Refer
• For details, see "[Original Size] (P.58)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[File Name]
Refer
• For details, see "[File Name] (P.58)."

▌Scan to PC > >

[Edge Erase]
Refer
• For details, see "[Edge Erase] (P.58)."

66 User Guide
Resetting or Saving the Settings
To reset or save the menu settings, tap [Scan to PC ].

▌[Scan to PC] > [Scan to PC ]>

[Reset]
Returns to the default settings.

▌[Scan to PC] > [Scan to PC ]>

[Save as New Default]
Saves as new default settings. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

▌[Scan to PC] > [Scan to PC ]>

[Save as New App]
Copies the tile of this job menu, and saves as new job menu. You can specify the menu name, and select the tile
color and icon.
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.2.9 [Address Book]

You can register, edit, or delete the contacts, such as fax numbers, and e-mail addresses in the address book.
Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Address Book] tile.
Select the personal or group contacts you want to edit or delete.

Adds the new contacts.

Searches for the contact displayed in the list.
[All] Selects a filter type to display from [All], [Email], [Fax], or [Favorites].

▌[Address Book] > >

[Add Contact]
Adds the personal e-mail address or/and fax number.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >

[Name]
Specifies a contact name.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >

[Index Key]
Specifies an index key. You can sort contacts and easily access your desired contacts.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >

Adds to your favorite contacts.

3 Using Your Printer 67

 ▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >
[Enter an email address.]
Enters an e-mails address of the contact.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >

[Enter a fax number.]
Enters a fax number of the contact.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Contact] >

Deletes the contacts.

▌[Address Book] > >

[Add Group]
Adds the group e-mail address or/and fax number. You can select the group type from [Email] or [Fax] to register
contacts.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Group] >

[Enter a group name.]
Enters a group name of the contact.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Group] >

[Index Key]
Specifies an index key. You can sort contacts and easily access your desired contacts.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Group] >

Adds to your favorite contacts.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Group] >

Deletes the contacts.

▌[Address Book] > > [Add Group] >

[Add Member]
Displays the group member list. Also, adds or deletes the member in the group.

3.2.10 [Device]
You can specify the basic printer settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Device] tile.
For details about the setting options, see "Understanding the Printer Menus (P.70)."

3.2.11 [Jobs]
You can check the status of in-progress jobs, pending jobs, and completed jobs. Also, you can print stored print
jobs and faxes. Select the following options to specify the desired settings.
Press the <Home> button, and then tap the [Jobs] tile.

[Job Filter] Switches the job status list.

[All Jobs]

68 User Guide
 [Fax Jobs]
[Print Jobs]
[Scan Jobs]
[Print Secure Fax] Prints or deletes stored faxes. You need to enter the password for
[Panel Lock].
Refer
• For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
[Stored Print Jobs] Prints or deletes stored print jobs. For [Secure Print], you need to
enter the password for [Panel Lock].

3 Using Your Printer 69

 3.3 Understanding the Printer Menus
This section describes the printer settings menu that can be accessed by tapping [Device] on the [Home] screen.
Note
• You can limit the access to some menus by setting the password. This prevents other users from inadvertently changing
the settings. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3.3.1 [Language]
Use this menu to select the display language.

3.3.2 [About]
Use this menu to check your printer information, including the fax number, IP address, and serial number of the
printer.

3.3.3 [Information Pages]

Use this menu to print various types of reports and lists.

▌[Information Pages] >

[System Settings]
Prints a list of information on printer settings and configuration, such as network settings and installed optional
accessories.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Panel Settings]
Prints a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.

▌[Information Pages] >

[PCL Fonts List]
Prints a sample of the available Printer Control Language (PCL) fonts.

▌[Information Pages] >

[PCL Macros List]
Prints the information on the downloaded PCL macro.

▌[Information Pages] >

[PS Fonts List]
Prints a sample of the available PostScript 3 Compatible fonts.

▌[Information Pages] >

[PDF Fonts List]
Prints a sample of the available PDF fonts.

70 User Guide
▌[Information Pages] >
[Job History]
Prints a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20
jobs.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Error History]
Prints a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Printer Meter]
Prints the reports for the total number of pages printed.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Demo Page]
Prints a page for testing colors.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Protocol Monitor]
Prints a detailed list of monitored protocols.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Address Book]
Prints a list of all addresses stored as address book information.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Server Address]
Prints a list of all members stored as server address information.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Fax Activity]
Prints the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Stored Fax List]
Prints a list of status of pending faxes.

▌[Information Pages] >

[Stored Documents List]
Prints a list of all print jobs saved using the stored print feature.
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled.

Printing a Report / List

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Information Pages].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

3 Using Your Printer 71

 3. Tap the desired report or list.

3.3.4 [Trays]
Use this menu to define the print media loaded in tray1, the bypass tray, and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Refer
• For details about supported paper sizes and types, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."

▌[Trays] >

[Bypass Tray]
Specifies the paper loaded in the bypass tray.

[Use Driver Setting] Specifies whether to use the paper size and type specified on the print driver.
[Paper Size]* Specifies the paper size.
[Paper Type]* Specifies the paper type.
[Display Tray Prompt] Specifies whether to display a popup message that prompts to set paper type
and paper size when paper is loaded in the bypass tray.

*
This setting is available only when [Use Driver Setting] is disabled.

▌[Trays] >

[Tray 1]
Specifies the paper loaded in tray1.

[Paper Size] Specifies the paper size.

[Paper Type] Specifies the paper type.
[Display Tray Prompt] Specifies whether to display a popup message that prompts to set the paper
type and paper size when paper is loaded in tray1.

▌[Trays] >

[Tray 2]
Note
• This setting is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Specifies the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

[Auto Detect] Specifies whether to automatically specify the paper size.

[Paper Size] Specifies the paper size.
[Paper Type] Specifies the paper type.
[Display Tray Prompt] Specifies whether to display a popup message that prompts to set the paper
type and paper size when paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

▌[Trays] >
[Tray Priority]
Sets the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays loaded with the same paper
size and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to this priority order.

72 User Guide
3.3.5 [Supplies]
Use this menu to check the remaining amount of consumables in percentage.
Note
• For non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridges, the remaining amount of toner is not displayed in percentage.

3.3.6 [Billing Meters]

Use this menu to check the total number of printed pages.

[Meter 1] Displays the total number of color prints.

[Meter 2] Displays the total number of monochrome prints.
[Meter 3] Always shows "0" on your printer.
[Meter 4] Displays the total number of color and monochrome prints ([Meter 1] +[Meter
2]).

3.3.7 [General]
Use this menu to configure general settings for the printer.

▌[General] >

[Date & Time]

Specifies the date and time formats.

▌[General] >

[Display Brightness]
Adjusts the screen brightness of the touch panel.

▌[General] >

[Sounds]
Specifies whether to emit a tone during operation or when a warning message appears.

[Enable Sound] Specifies whether to enable adjusting volume.

[Select] Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
[Invalid] Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
[Copy \ Print] Selects the volume for a tone when a copy or print job is complete.
[Fax Print] Selects the volume for a tone when printing a fax job is complete.
[Fax Sent] Selects the volume for a tone when sending a fax job is complete.
[Secure Print Received] Selects the volume for a tone when the printer saves a stored print job in the
memory.
[Error \ Fault] Selects the volume for a tone when a job ends abnormally or a problem
occurs.
[Out of Paper] Selects the volume for a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
[Near Life End (Consumables)] Selects the volume for a tone when toner is low.
[Auto Clear Alert] Selects the volume for a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto
clear.

3 Using Your Printer 73

 [Device Ready] Selects the volume for a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
[Recovered from Error] Selects the volume for a tone when an error is resolved.
[Powering Off] Selects the volume for a tone when the printer is turned off.

▌[General] >

[NFC]
Specifies whether to allow a mobile device such as a tablet or a smartphone to connect to the printer via NFC
communication.

▌[General] >

[Blue LED]
Specifies whether to enable the blue blinking feature of the Status LED on the operator panel.
Refer
• For details about the Status LED, see "Operator Panel (P.15)."

▌[General] >

[Energy Saver]
Specifies the time for transition to power saver mode.

[Low Power Timer] Specifies the time for the printer to enter the low power mode. The printer
enters this mode when it is not used for the specified time.
[Sleep Timer] Specifies the time for the printer to enter the sleep mode after it has entered
the low power mode.

When you specify 1 minute for [Low Power Timer], the printer enters the low power mode 1 minute after it has
been idle for the specified time. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer.
Specify 1 minute if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if the printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate
with minimum warm-up time.
Select a medium value if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from a computer or
remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing the
<Power> button on the operator panel.

▌[General] >
[Timers]
Configures timer settings.

▌[General] > [Timers] >

[Auto Clear]
Automatically resets the settings for the print, copy, scan, or fax function to the default settings and return to
the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.

▌[General] > [Timers] >

[Fault Timeout]
Specifies whether to specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
The print job is canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.

74 User Guide
▌[General] >
[Units]
Specifies the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the touch panel.
Note
• The default setting varies depending on other settings, such as [Country/Region] and the size of the document.

▌[General] >
[Default Paper Size]
Specifies the default paper size.

▌[General] >
[Fax Settings]
Use this menu to configure the fax settings.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Fax Number]
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of a fax.
Note
• Make sure to specify this setting before using [Junk Fax Filter].

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Country/Region]
Selects the country where the printer is used.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Company Name]
Sets the sender name to be printed on the header of a fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Fax Line Settings]
Configures basic settings for the fax line.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] >

[Line Type]
Specifies the default line type.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] >

[Line Monitor Tone Volume]
Specifies whether to set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the
internal speaker until a connection is made.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] >

[DRPD Pattern]
Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.

3 Using Your Printer 75

 Pattern1–7 Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) is a service provided by some
telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone
company. The following shows the patterns provided with the printer.

Pattern1

Pattern2

Pattern3

Pattern4

Pattern5

Pattern6

Pattern7

Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this
service. For example, Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive
ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings for 400 ms and stops
for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only
responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] >

[Ext. Phone Hook Threshold]
Specifies the detection level of an off-hook signal from the external telephone.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] >

[Off Hook Wake Up]
Specifies whether to wake up from the power saver mode when you pick up the handset of the external
telephone.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Incoming Fax Settings]
Configures settings for incoming fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Receive Mode]
Selects the default fax receiving mode.

[TEL Mode] Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code,
or by tapping [Receive] on the touch panel.
[FAX Mode] Automatically receives faxes.

76 User Guide
[TEL/FAX Mode] When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for
the time specified in [TEL/FAX Mode] under [Auto Answer Setup], and then
the printer starts receiving the fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer
beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
[Ans/FAX Mode] This mode is intended for use with an answering machine. When the
answering machine receives the call, the printer monitors the call for fax
tones. When the printer detects fax tones, the printer automatically receives
the fax. When the answering machine is off, the printer goes into [FAX Mode]
after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time. If the phone communication
in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
[DRPD Mode] Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate
number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to
monitor for that specific ring pattern.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Ring Tone Volume]
Specifies whether to set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call
through the internal speaker when [Receive Mode] is set to [TEL/FAX Mode].

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Auto Answer Setup]
Configures settings for automatic fax reception.

[FAX Mode] Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call.
[TEL/FAX Mode] Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.
[Ans/FAX Mode] Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Junk Fax Filter]
Specifies whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the
address book.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Forward Settings]
Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

[Off]
[Forward] Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints
incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
[Forwarding Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
Number] faxes are forwarded.
[Print and Forward] Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified
destination.
[Forwarding Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
Number] faxes are forwarded.
[Forward to Forwards incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Prints
Email]*1,2,3 incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.

3 Using Your Printer 77

 [Print and Email]*2,3 Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified
e-mail address.
[Forward to Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address. Prints
Server]*2,3 incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
[Print & Fwd to Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified
Server]*3,4 server address.

*1
Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer may not get an error which occurs during the transfer.
*2
This setting is available only when the e-mail server information is registered on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
*3 This setting is available only when the forwarding destinations are registered on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of
CentreWare Internet Services.
*4 This setting is available only when the file server information is registered on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies whether to print the received faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Note
• This feature may not be available depending on the size of the received faxes or settings of the trays, etc.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Remote Receive]
Specifies whether to enable receiving a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after
picking up the handset of the telephone. You can specify a two-digit code to start receiving a fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax Settings] >

[Auto Reduction]
Specifies whether to set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire
page does not fit the output paper. You can also set to automatically reduce a fax page to fit it onto the
appropriate paper size.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Outgoing Fax Settings]
Configures settings for transmitting fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Auto Redial Setup]
Configures settings for automatic redial.

[Number of Redials] Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number
is busy. If you enter 0, the printer does not redial.
[Redial Interval] Sets the interval between redial attempts.
[Interval Timer] Sets the interval between re-send attempts.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Dial Type]
Selects the dialing type.

[PB] Uses tone dialing.

[DP (10pps)] Sets dial pulse, 10 pulse per second as the dial type.
[DP (20pps)] Sets dial pulse, 20 pulse per second as the dial type.

78 User Guide
▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >
[Prefix Dial]
Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number. You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number
dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange
(PABX).

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Cover Sheet]
Specifies whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Send Header]
Specifies whether to print the sender information on the header of a fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[ECM]
Specifies whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM) feature. To use the ECM feature, the remote fax
machines must also support the ECM feature.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Modem Speed]
Adjusts the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] >

[Display Manual Fax Recipient]
Specifies whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the screen when manually sending a fax.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] >

[Fax Reports]
Configures settings for fax reports.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Reports] >

[Fax Activity]
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Reports] >

[Fax Transmit]
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.

[Print Always] Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

[Print On Error] Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
[Print Disabled] Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Reports] >

[Fax Broadcast]
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.

[Print Always] Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

[Print On Error] Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
[Print Disabled] Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.

3 Using Your Printer 79

 ▌[General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Reports] >
[Protocol Monitor]
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication
problem.

[Print Always] Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
[Print On Error] Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
[Print Disabled] Does not print the protocol monitor report.

▌[General] >

[Email Settings]
Use this menu to configure the e-mail settings.

▌[General] > [Email Settings] >

[Max Email Size]
Specifies the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

3.3.8 [Network Settings]

Use this menu to configure the wired or wireless network settings.

▌[Network Settings] >

[Wi-Fi]
Note
• This setting is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and the wireless LAN adapter is connected to the
printer.
Checks or specifies wireless network settings.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[Wi-Fi Setup Wizard]
Configures the wireless settings by selecting an access point or wireless router from the displayed screen or by
tapping [Enter SSID] or [WPS].

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] >

[Enter SSID]
Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] > [Enter SSID] >
[Infrastructure]
Configures the wireless settings in an infrastructure network.

[No Encryption] Configures the wireless setting without specifying an encryption

type.
[Mixed mode PSK] Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type
of [Mixed mode PSK]. [Mixed mode PSK] automatically selects
the encryption type from either WPA-PSK-AES or WPA2-PSK-AES.
[Enter a passphrase.] Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to
63 bytes long, and the hexadecimal characters of 64 bytes long.

80 User Guide
[WPA2-PSK-AES] Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type
of [WPA2-PSK-AES].
[Enter a passphrase.] Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to
63 bytes long, and the hexadecimal characters of 64 bytes long.
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)
[WEP] Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For
64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For
128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
[Enter 10 or 26 hex Specifies the transmit key.
characters.]

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] > [Enter SSID] >
[Ad hoc]
Configures the wireless settings in an Ad-hoc network.

[No Encryption] Configures the wireless setting without specifying an encryption

type.
[WEP] Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For
64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For
128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
[Enter 10 or 26 hex Specifies the transmit key.
characters.]

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[WPS]
Configures the wireless network using WPS.

[Connect via PIN] Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned by the printer.
You can also print the PIN code. Check it when entering the PIN assigned to
the printer into your computer.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[IP Mode]
Configures the IP mode.

[Dual Stack] Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
[IPv4] Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
[IPv6] Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[TCP/IP]
Configures TCP/IP settings.

[IP Addressing] [DHCP/AutoIP] Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range
of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use
on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as
255.255.0.0.
[BOOTP] Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
[RARP] Sets the IP address using RARP.
[DHCP] Sets the IP address using DHCP.
[Manual Input] Sets the IP address manually.

3 Using Your Printer 81

 [IP Address] When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to
the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
[Subnet Mask] When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to
255.255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
[Gateway Address] When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address
is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[Disable IPsec]
Note
• This setting is available only when [IPsec] is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Disables IPsec communication.

▌[Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] >

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
Initializes wireless network settings. After executing this setting and restarting the printer, all wireless network
settings are reset to their default values.

▌[Network Settings] >

[Wi-Fi Direct]
Note
• This setting is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and the wireless LAN adapter is connected to the
printer.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.

[Wi-Fi Direct] Enables or disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.

[Group Role] [Auto] Automatically sets the group role of the printer.
[Group Owner] Sets the printer as the group owner over the Wi-Fi
Direct network. Setting the printer to become the
group owner makes it possible for mobile devices to
discover the printer. The SSID of the printer is
displayed in the list of wireless networks on your
mobile device.
[Device Name] Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi
Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric
characters. Check it when selecting the printer name
on your mobile device.

82 User Guide
[Paired Device] Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections
between the printer and up to 3 Wi-Fi mobile devices.
[Disconnect All] [Disconnect Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections right
Now] now.
[Disconnect and Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and resets
Reset the passphrase.
Passphrase]
[SSID] Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct
network. You can also specify the name with up to 32
alphanumeric characters except for "DIRECT-XX."
Check it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network
name on your mobile device.
[Passphrase] Displays the passphrase. Check it when entering the
passphrase into your mobile device.
[Print Prints the passphrase. Check it when entering the
Passphrase] passphrase into your mobile device.
[Reset Resets the passphrase.
Passphrase]
[WPS Setup] Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
[Push Button Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with Wi-Fi
Configuration] Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration
(WPS-PBC).
[PIN Code] Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using the PIN
code assigned by the printer.
[Print PIN Code] Prints the PIN code. Check it when entering the PIN
assigned to the printer into your mobile device.
[Reset PIN Resets the PIN code.
Code]

▌[Network Settings] >

[Ethernet]
Note
• This setting is available only when the printer is connected to a wired network.
Checks or specifies wired network settings.

▌[Network Settings] > [Ethernet] >

[IP Mode]
Configures the IP mode.

[Dual Stack] Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
[IPv4] Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
[IPv6] Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.

▌[Network Settings] > [Ethernet] >

[TCP/IP]
Configures TCP/IP settings.

3 Using Your Printer 83

 [IP Addressing] [DHCP/AutoIP] Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range
of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use
on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as
255.255.0.0.
[BOOTP] Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
[RARP] Sets the IP address using RARP.
[DHCP] Sets the IP address using DHCP.
[Manual Input] Sets the IP address manually.
[IP Address] When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to
the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
[Subnet Mask] When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to
255.255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
[Gateway Address] When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address
is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

▌[Network Settings] > [Ethernet] >

[Modem Speed]
Specifies the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after
the printer is restarted.

[Auto]
[10BASE-T Half]
[10BASE-T Full]
[100BASE-TX Half]
[100BASE-TX Full]
[1000BASE-TX Full]

▌[Network Settings] > [Ethernet] >

[Disable IPsec]
Note
• This setting is available only when [IPsec] is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Disables IPsec communication.

▌[Network Settings] >

[Protocol]
Enables or disables each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is restarted.

[LPD]
[Port 9100]
[FTP]

84 User Guide
[IPP]
[SMB]
[WSD Print]*1
[WSD Scan]
[Network TWAIN]
[SNMP UDP]*2
[Email Alerts]
[Internet Services]
[Bonjour (mDNS)]
[Telnet]
[Update Address Book]
[HTTP - SSL/TLS]
[Google Cloud Print]
*1
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
*2
SNMP stands for Simple Network Management Protocol.

▌[Network Settings] >

[Other]
Specifies advanced network settings.

▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >

[IPv4 Filter]
Specifies whether to allow communication with devices whose IPv4 addresses are registered in the printer.
Note
• This feature does not apply to communication via Wi-Fi Direct.

▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >

[IPv6 Filter]
Specifies whether to allow communication with devices whose IPv6 addresses are registered in the printer.
Note
• This feature does not apply to communication via Wi-Fi Direct.

▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >

[PS Data Format]
Specifies the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer
is restarted.

[Auto] Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication

protocol.
[Normal] Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
[BCP] Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
[TBCP] Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data
to switch between them according to the specified control code.
[Binary] Used when no special processing is required for data.

3 Using Your Printer 85

 ▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >
[Disable IEEE 802.1x]
Note
• This setting is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable and the IEEE 802.1x authentication
is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Disables IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is restarted.

▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >

[Reset Network Settings]
Initializes wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this setting and restarting
the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.

▌[Network Settings] > [Other] >

[Delete All Certificates]
Deletes all certificates of the printer. After executing this setting and restarting the printer, all certificates are
deleted.

3.3.9 [App Defaults]

Use this menu to specify the default settings for the copy, fax, and scan functions, and the USB Direct Print
feature.

▌[App Defaults] >

[Copy Settings]
Specifies the default settings for the copy function.

▌[App Defaults] > [Copy Settings] >

[Color Balance]
Sets the color balance level of low/medium/high density for each color.
Refer
• For details about the settings other than the above one, see "[Copy] (P.51)."

▌[App Defaults] >

[Fax Settings]
Specifies the default settings for the fax function.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Fax] (P.55)."

▌[App Defaults] >

[Scan Settings]
Specifies the default settings for the scan function.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Scan to Network] (P.63)."

▌[App Defaults] >

[USB Direct Print Settings]

Specifies the default settings for the USB Direct Print feature.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[USB] (P.59)."

86 User Guide
3.3.10 [Security Settings]
Use this menu to configure the security settings, such as limiting access to the menus or functions with a
password. This prevents the printer settings from being changed accidentally.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Panel Lock]
Specifies whether to limit access to the menus with a password, and to change the password.

[Panel Lock Settings] Sets password protection for the following menus:
• [Information Pages]
• [General]
• [Network Settings]
• [App Defaults]
• [Security Settings]
• [Maintenance]
• [Advanced Settings]
[Change Passcode]* Changes the four-digit password required to access the menus.

*
This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Service Lock]
Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled. For details about this setting, see "[Panel Lock] (P.87)."
Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to use a password to restrict the use of a
function except for [Direct Fax]. For [Copy] and [USB Direct Print], you can restrict just the color copying and
color printing features with a password.

[Change Passcode]* Changes the four-digit password that is set under the [Service
Lock] menu.
[Copy] Specifies the settings for the copy function.
[Scan to Email] Specifies the settings for the Scan to Email feature.
[Fax] Specifies the settings for the fax function.
[Direct Fax] Specifies the settings for the Direct Fax feature.
[Scan to Network] Specifies the settings for the Scan to Network feature.
[Scan to PC/WSD] Specifies the settings for the Scan to PC and Scan to WSD
features.
[PC Scan] Specifies the settings for scanning from a computer.
[Scan to USB Drive] Specifies the settings for the Scan to USB Drive feature.
[USB Direct Print] Specifies the settings for the USB Direct Print feature.
[USB Settings] [Show When Specifies whether to show the [USB] screen when a USB flash
Inserted] drive is inserted into the printer.

*
This setting is available only when [Lock with Passcode] or [Lock Only Color with Passcode] is enabled.

3 Using Your Printer 87

 ▌[Security Settings] >

[Secure Fax Receive]

Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled. For details about this setting, see "[Panel Lock] (P.87)."
Specifies whether to require a password to print received faxes, and to change the password.

[Secure Fax Receive] Sets to require a password to print received faxes.

[Change Passcode]* Changes the four-digit password required to print received faxes.

*
This setting is available only when [Secure Fax Receive] is enabled.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Print Auditron]
Use this menu to configure the print restriction settings.

▌[Security Settings] > [Print Auditron] >

[Print Auditron]
Specifies whether to limit access to color printing.
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled.

▌[Security Settings] > [Print Auditron] >

[Unauthenticated User Print]
Specifies whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled.

▌[Security Settings] > [Print Auditron] >

[Auto Color To Mono Print]
Specifies whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Edit Email From Field]
Specifies whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you send scanned data via e-mail.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Confirm Recipients]
Specifies whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.
Note
• If this setting is set to [On], recipients can only be selected from the address book. You cannot directly enter an address
or fax number.

[Off] Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually
sent.
[On] Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.

88 User Guide
▌[Security Settings] >
[Domain Filtering]
Specifies whether to restrict sending e-mails to specified domains.
Note
• Set the domains from [SMTP Domain Filtering] on CentreWare Internet Services. See the help of CentreWare Internet
Services.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Software Download]
Specifies whether to enable download of firmware updates.

▌[Security Settings] >

[Login Attempts]
Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled. For details about this setting, see "[Panel Lock] (P.87)."
Specifies whether to specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in the menus protected
by [Panel Lock], [Service Lock], and [Secure Fax Receive].

3.3.11 [Maintenance]
Use this menu to configure the maintenance settings, such as adjusting the fusing unit and cleaning the
transfer unit.

▌[Maintenance] >

[Adjust Paper Type]

Adjusts the paper type.

▌[Maintenance] >

[Adjust Transfer Belt Unit]

Adjusts the transfer bias when repeated images (ghosting) appear on the output.

[K Offset] If faint black colored ghosts appear, decrease the value.

[YMC Offset] If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, decrease the value.

▌[Maintenance] >

[Adjust 2nd BTR]

Note
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Specifies the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type. If you see mottles on the print output,
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, decrease the voltage. For details about the
setting values, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

▌[Maintenance] >

[Fusing Unit Adjustment]

Note
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Adjusts the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type. When the printouts are curled, lower the
temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, increase the temperature. For details about
the setting values, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

3 Using Your Printer 89

 ▌[Maintenance] >

[Adjust Color Registration]

[Auto Registration] Automatically performs color registration correction.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Calibration]
Specifies and calibrates the copy or/and print function(s). This feature corrects consistency of printing colors
over time, environment and print media.

▌[Maintenance] >

[Clean Developer/Transfer Unit]

Cleans the developer and the transfer unit. This setting is useful for resolving a fog problem on printouts.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Toner Refresh]
Ensures a proper balance between toner and developing powder. This setting is useful for resolving a fog
problem on printouts.
Note
• This feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridges and the drum cartridges.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Initialize NVM]
Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this setting and restarting the printer, all the menu
parameters are reset to their default values.

[Fax Settings] Initializes the fax number entries in the address book.
[Scan Settings] Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the address book.
[User Account Settings] Initializes the user registration information.
[User App Settings] Initializes the widget application information.
[System Settings] Initializes the system parameters.
[Address Book] Initializes the address entries in the address book.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Initialize Print Meter]
Initializes the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Clear Stored Jobs]
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled.
Clears print jobs saved using the stored print feature.

[All Documents] Deletes all print jobs saved using the stored print feature.
[Secure Documents] Deletes print jobs saved using the Secure Print feature.
[Stored Documents] Deletes print jobs saved using the Sample Set feature.

90 User Guide
▌[Maintenance] >
[Non-Genuine Toner]
Specifies whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Important
• Using a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridge may severely damage the printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused
by using a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridge.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Adjust Altitude]
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
Note
• An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc.

▌[Maintenance] >
[Delete Job History]
Clears the job history of all finished jobs.

3.3.12 [Advanced Settings]

Use this menu to customize the settings in accordance with the setting environment, or your preferences.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[PS Settings]
Use this menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation
printer language.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PS Settings] >

[PS Error Report]
Specifies whether to print the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description
language. The change becomes effective after the printer is restarted.
Note
• Instructions from the PostScript 3 Compatible driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PS Settings] >

[PS Job Timeout]
Specifies whether to specify the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job. The change becomes
effective after the printer is restarted.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PS Settings] >

[Paper Trays]
Specifies the way to select the tray for PostScript 3 Compatible mode. The change becomes effective after the
printer is restarted.

[Auto] The tray is selected in accordance with the PCL mode.

[Select from Tray] The tray is selected in accordance with regular PostScript 3 Compatible
printers.

3 Using Your Printer 91

 ▌[Advanced Settings] > [PS Settings] >
[PS Default Color]
Specifies the color mode.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[PCL Settings]
Use this menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the Printer Control Language (PCL)
emulation printer language.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Paper Trays]
Specifies the default paper tray.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Output Size]
Specifies the default paper size.
Note
• Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Original Orientation]
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[2-Sided]
Specifies whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For a two-sided printing, you can specify the
printout to be bound by the long edge or short edge.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Font]
Specifies the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Symbol Set]
Specifies a symbol set for a specified font.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Font Size]
Specifies the font size for scalable typographic fonts. Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font.
One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch (approximately 0.35 mm).
Note
• This setting is only displayed for typographic fonts.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Font Pitch]
Specifies the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts. Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters
in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
Note
• This setting is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.

92 User Guide
▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >
[Form Line]
Sets the number of lines in a page. The printer sets the amount of space between two vertical lines based on the
[Output Size] and [Original Orientation] menu items. Select the correct paper size and orientation before
changing this setting.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Quantity]
Sets the default print quantity. Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the print driver. Values
selected from the print driver always override values selected from the operator panel.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Image Enhance]
Specifies whether to make the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and
enhance the visual appearance.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Hex Dump]
Specifies whether to help to isolate the source of a print job problem. With this setting enabled, all data sent to
the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Draft Mode]
Specifies whether to save toner when printing. The print quality is reduced when printing in this mode.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Line Termination]
Adds the line termination commands.

[Off] The line termination command is not added.

CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
[Add LF] The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
[Add CR] The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
[CR-XX] The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Output Color]
Specifies the color mode.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PCL Settings] >

[Ignore Form Feed]
Specifies whether to ignore blank pages that only contain form feed control codes.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[PDF Settings]
Use this menu to change printer settings that only affect PDF files.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Quantity]
Specifies the number of copies to print.

3 Using Your Printer 93

 ▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >
[2-Sided]
Specifies whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For a two-sided printing, you can specify the
printout to be bound by the long edge or short edge.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Print Mode]
Specifies the print mode.

[Normal] For documents with normal sized characters.

[Fine] For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using
a dot-matrix printer.
[High Speed] Prints with the higher speed than the [Normal] mode, but the quality is less.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[PDF Password]
Specifies the password used to protect PDF files from printing.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Collation]
Specifies whether to sort PDF files.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Output Size]
Specifies the output paper size for PDF files.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Layout]
Specifies the output layout.

[1-Up] Prints the document in the layout specified by the printer.

[Off (No Scaling)] Prints in the same size as the document.
[Booklet Creation] Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper bound by the edge.
[2-Up] Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
[4-Up] Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[PDF Default Color]
Specifies the default output color.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [PDF Settings] >

[Detect Job Separator]
Specifies whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[USB Port Settings]
Use this menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [USB Port Settings] >

[Port Status]
Note
• This setting is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.

94 User Guide
Specifies whether to enable the USB port of the printer. The change becomes effective after the printer is
restarted.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [USB Port Settings] >

[PS Data Format]
Specifies the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer
is restarted.

[Auto] Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication

protocol.
[Normal] Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
[BCP] Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
[TBCP] Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data
to switch between them according to the specified control code.
[Binary] Used when no special processing is required for data.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [USB Port Settings] >

[Job Timeout]
Specifies whether to specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print
job is canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[Copy Settings]
Use this menu to configure advanced copy settings.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Copy Settings] >

[BackgroundSuppressionLevel]
Specifies the background suppression level.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[Scan Settings]
Use this menu to configure advanced scan settings.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Scan Settings] >

[BackgroundSuppressionLevel]
Specifies the background suppression level.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Scan Settings] >

[TIFF Format]
Specifies the TIFF file format.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Scan Settings] >

[Quality/File Size]
Specifies the image compression level.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[Output Settings]
Configures settings concerning output from the printer.

3 Using Your Printer 95

 ▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >
[RAM Disk]
Specifies whether to allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the stored print feature. When this feature
is enabled, the RAM disk size can be specified. The change becomes effective after the printer is restarted.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[Print ID]
Specifies whether to print the user ID when printing as well as to specify a location where the ID is printed.
Note
• When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[Print Text]
Specifies whether to print Page Description Language (PDL) data which is not supported by the printer as text.
Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[Substitute Tray]
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not
match the paper size settings for the current job.

[Off] No tray size substitute accepted.

[Larger Size] Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the
printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
[Nearest Size] Substitutes paper of nearest size.
[Use Bypass Tray] Substitutes paper from the bypass tray.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[A4/Letter Switch]
Specifies whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available, or to print Letter size
jobs on A4 size paper if Letter size paper is not available.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[Banner Sheet]
Specifies the position to insert the banner sheet and the tray to load the sheet.

[Insert Position] [Off] Does not print the banner sheet.

[Front] Inserts the banner sheet before the first page of every copy.
[Back] Inserts the banner sheet after the last page of every copy.
[Front & Back] Inserts the banner sheet before the first page of every copy and
after the last page of every copy.
[Paper Trays] [Bypass] Specifies the bypass tray to load the banner sheet.
[Tray 1] Specifies the tray1 to load the banner sheet.
[Tray 2]* Specifies the optional 550-sheet feeder to load the banner
sheet.

*
This setting is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >

[Report 2-Sided Print]
Specifies whether to print reports on both sides of a sheet of paper.

96 User Guide
▌[Advanced Settings] > [Output Settings] >
[Letterhead 2-Sided Print]
Specifies whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[Low Toner Alert Message]

Specifies whether to show the alert message when toner is low.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[Job History]
Specifies whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs. The change becomes effective
after the printer is restarted.
This report can also be printed using the [Information Pages] menu.

▌[Advanced Settings] >

[LDAP Address Book]

Specifies whether to enable searching an LDAP server for fax numbers or e-mail addresses from the printer.

[Off] Disables searching for fax numbers or e-mail addresses.

[On] Enables searching for both fax numbers and e-mail addresses.
[On (Fax Only)] Enables searching for only fax numbers.
[On (Email Only)] Enables searching for only e-mail addresses.

3.3.13 Resetting Defaults

After executing this setting and restarting the printer, address book and menu parameters are reset to their
default values.
The following menu parameters are not reset.
• Network settings
• [Panel Lock] settings and password
• [Service Lock] settings for [Copy], [Email], [Fax], [Scan to Network], [Scan to PC/WSD], [PC Scan], [Scan to
USB Drive], [USB Direct Print] and saved passwords
• [Secure Fax Receive] settings and saved password
• [Login Attempts] settings
• [Port Status] settings
• [Print Auditron] settings
• [Unauthenticated User Print] settings
To reset the settings, perform the following procedure:

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [Maintenance] > [Initialize NVM].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap the desired setting.
[Fax Settings] Resets the fax number entries in the address book.
[Scan Settings] Resets the e-mail and server address entries in the address book.
[User Account Settings] Resets the user registration information.

3 Using Your Printer 97

 [User App Settings] Resets the widget application information.
[System Settings] Resets the system parameters.
[Address Book] Resets the address entries in the address book.

4. Tap [Start].

98 User Guide
3.4 CentreWare Internet Services
Use CentreWare Internet Services to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You
can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering
replacement consumables.
Note
• This feature is available only when the printer is connected to a network.

3.4.1 Preparing to Use CentreWare Internet

Services
Perform the following procedure to configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the
operator panel before using CentreWare Internet Services.

Setting Up Your Web Browser

Specifying the printer's IP address in the web browser is recommended.
Note
• If you specify the printer's IP address using a proxy server, the service response time may be slow or the screens may not
appear. If these problems occur, you will need to set the printer's IP address in the web browser and choose not to use a
proxy server. See your web browser's manual for how to make the setting.

Confirming the Menu on the Operator Panel

You can start CentreWare Internet Services only when [Internet Services] is enabled on the operator panel.
Check the operator panel setting if you cannot start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about this setting, see "[Protocol] (P.84)."

3.4.2 Starting CentreWare Internet Services

To start CentreWare Internet Services, enter the printer's IP address in the address bar of your web browser.

3 Using Your Printer 99

 If you do not know the IP address of the printer, verify the IP address by using the operator panel, or printing the
System Settings report. For details about how to verify the IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings (P.43)."
Refer
• For details about the printer settings that can be set using CentreWare Internet Services, see the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Note
• You can also start CentreWare Internet Services from the supplied program, Print & Scan Hub.
• Specify the link-local address in IPv6 mode.

3.4.3 Managing Access to Printer Menus

Some printer settings can be protected from access by unauthorized users with an administrator name and
password so that these settings are not inadvertently changed. In the following procedure, you can change the
name and password, as well as specify the number of login attempts allowed.
Note
• "11111" and "x-admin" are the default administrator name and password.

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [Administrator Settings] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Select the [Enabled] check box from the [Administrator Mode] drop-down list box.
4. Enter an administrator name in the [Administrator Login ID] text box.
5. Enter an administrator password in the [Administrator Password] and [Re-enter Password] text box.
6. Enter the number of login attempts allowed in the [Maximum Login Attempts] text box.
7. Click [Apply].

100 User Guide

3.5 Reducing Power Consumption
The printer has the power saver mode that reduces power consumption and saves on electrical consumption
compared to leaving the printer fully on. The power saver mode consists of the low power mode and sleep mode.
The sleep mode further reduces power consumption.
The printer enters the low power mode after a period of inactivity, and then the printer enters the sleep mode
when the printer has not been used continuously after it has entered the low power mode.

3.5.1 Entering the Power Saver Mode

The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain period of time. The printer
also enters the power saver mode when performing the following procedure.

1. Press the <Power> button.

2. Tap [Sleep Mode].
When the printer is in the power saver mode, the <Power> button blinks slowly.

3.5.2 Changing the Elapsed Time Before the Printer

Enters the Power Saver Mode
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [General] > [Energy Saver].
Note
• If [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap [Low Power Timer] or [Sleep Timer].
4. Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.
5. Tap [OK].
Refer
• For details, see "[Energy Saver] (P.74)."

3 Using Your Printer 101

 3.6 Print Media Guidelines
This section describes selecting and caring for print media. The printer provides high-quality printing on a variety
of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for the printer helps to avoid printing troubles.

WARNING
• Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper. When paper
jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
Important
• The toner may come off the print media if it gets wet by water, rain, steam, and so on. For details, contact the Fuji Xerox
local representative office or an authorized dealer.
Note
• Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet print media.
Refer
• For details about how to avoid paper jam, see "Before Loading (P.107)."

3.6.1 Supported Print Media

Bypass Tray
Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
*1
A5 (210 x 148 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)*1
16K (194 x 267 mm)*2
16K (195 x 270 mm)*2
Legal (8.5 x 14")
8.5 x 13"
Letter (8.5 x 11")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)*1
No.10 Envelope (4.1 x 9.5")*1
DL Envelope (110 x 220 mm)*1
Monarch Envelope (3.9 x 7.5")*1
Postcard (4 x 6")*1
5 x 7"*1
Custom*3:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5")
Length: 127 – 355.6 mm (5 – 14")

102 User Guide

Paper Type Plain (60 – 90 gsm)
Bond (91 – 105 gsm)
Recycled (60 – 90 gsm)
Letterhead (60 – 90 gsm)
Preprinted (60 – 90 gsm)
Prepunched (60 – 90 gsm)
Colored (60 – 90 gsm)
Covers (106 – 176 gsm)
Covers Thick (177 – 220 gsm)*1
Rough Surface*1*4
Coated (106 – 176 gsm)
Coated Thick (177 – 220 gsm)*1
Labels*1
Envelope*1
Loading Capacity 50 sheets of the standard paper

*1
Duplex printing is not available.
*2
This is available on certain regions.
*3
Acceptable custom paper size and weight for duplex printing:
Width: 139.7 mm (5.5") to 215.9 mm (8.5")
Length: 210 mm (8.27") to 355.6 mm (14")
Weight: 60 – 176 gsm
*4 Changing the paper type to [Rough Surface] is preferable if print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur when selecting [Covers Thick].

Tray1
Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
*1
A5 (210 x 148 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm) *1

16K (194 x 267 mm)*2

16K (195 x 270 mm)*2
Legal (8.5 x 14")
8.5 x 13"
Letter (8.5 x 11")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)*1
No.10 Envelope (4.1 x 9.5")*1
DL Envelope (110 x 220 mm)*1
Monarch Envelope (3.9 x 7.5")*1
Postcard (4 x 6")*1
5 x 7"*1
Custom*3:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5")
Length: 148 – 355.6 mm (5.8 – 14")

3 Using Your Printer 103

 Paper Type Plain (60 – 90 gsm)
Bond (91 – 105 gsm)
Recycled (60 – 90 gsm)
Letterhead (60 – 90 gsm)
Preprinted (60 – 90 gsm)
Prepunched (60 – 90 gsm)
Colored (60 – 90 gsm)
Covers (106 – 176 gsm)
Covers Thick (177 – 220 gsm)*1
Coated (106 – 176 gsm)
Coated Thick (177 – 220 gsm)*1
Labels*1
Envelope*1
Loading Capacity 250 sheets of the standard paper

*1
Duplex printing is not available.
*2
This is available on certain regions.
*3 Acceptable custom paper size and weight for duplex printing:
Width: 139.7 mm (5.5") to 215.9 mm (8.5")
Length: 210 mm (8.27") to 355.6 mm (14")
Weight: 60 – 176 gsm

Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
Legal (8.5 x 14")
8.5 x 13"
Letter (8.5 x 11")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
Custom*1:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5")
Length: 190.5 – 355.6 mm (7.5 – 14")
Paper Type Plain (60 – 90 gsm)
Bond (91 – 105 gsm)
Recycled (60 – 90 gsm)
Letterhead (60 – 90 gsm)
Preprinted (60 – 90 gsm)
Prepunched (60 – 90 gsm)
Colored (60 – 90 gsm)
Covers (106 – 176 gsm)
Covers Thick (177 – 220 gsm)*2
Coated (106 – 176 gsm)
Labels*2
Loading Capacity 550 sheets of the standard paper

*1
Acceptable custom paper size and weight for duplex printing:
Width: 139.7 mm (5.5") to 215.9 mm (8.5")
Length: 210 mm (8.27") to 355.6 mm (14")
Weight: 60 – 176 gsm
*2
Duplex printing is not available.

104 User Guide

3.6.2 Supported Paper Weight
Paper type Weight (gsm)
Plain 60 – 90
Bond 91 – 105
Recycled 60 – 90
Letterhead 60 – 90
Preprinted 60 – 90
Prepunched 60 – 90
Colored 60 – 90
Covers 106 – 176
Covers Thick 177 – 220
Rough Surface 177 – 220
Coated 106 – 176
Coated Thick 177 – 220
Labels –
Envelope –

3.6.3 Recommended Print Media

Proper print media selection helps to prevent paper jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Fuji Xerox recommends the standard print media shown in the following table. For more information, contact
your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Paper Name Weight

Fuji Xerox P 64 gsm
Fuji Xerox C2 70 gsm

3.6.4 Unacceptable Print Media

• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Pre-printed paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Pre-printed paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit
• Pre-printed paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09
inch, such as Optical Character Recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, you can adjust registration with
your software program to successfully print on these forms.
• Erasable bond, synthetic paper, and thermal paper
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
• Recycled paper containing more than 25 percent post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19309
• Multiple-part forms or documents
• Talc or acid paper that may deteriorate print quality (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text)

3 Using Your Printer 105

 3.6.5 Print Media Storage Guidelines
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help you to avoid print media feeding problems and
uneven print quality.
• Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative
humidity is 40 percent.
• Store print media on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Print media should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinet, rather than directly on the floor.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

106 User Guide

3.7 Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is
usually indicated on the print media package.

3.7.1 Before Loading

Important
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Note
• Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper.
• Use only recommended print media. For details, see "Print Media Guidelines (P.102)."
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For details about how to store the print media, see "Print Media
Storage Guidelines (P.106)."
• Do not overload the print media sources. Make sure that the print media stack height does not exceed the maximum
height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten the print media before loading.
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not mix different print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
• Make sure that the recommended print side is facing up when you load the print media.
• Make sure that all cables that connect to the printer are attached correctly.
• To prevent jams and multi-feed caused by misfeeding print media, wipe the retard rollers and paper feed rollers of tray1,
the optional 550-sheet feeder, and the bypass tray with a cloth moistened with water. For details, see "Cleaning the
Retard Rollers and Paper Feed Rollers (P.204)."
• Do not perform a print job when the bypass tray is removed.

3.7.2 Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the

Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
Important
• To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.

1. Pull the tray out of the printer.

For the optional 550-sheet feeder:

3 Using Your Printer 107

 a Pull the tray of the optional 550-sheet feeder halfway out of the printer.

b Hold the tray with both hands, slightly tip the front of the tray upwards, and then pull it out completely.

108 User Guide

2. Adjust the paper guides according to the paper size that you want to load.

Note
• When you load Legal-size paper, extend the tray while pushing the lever located on the front part of the tray.

3. Before loading the print media, flex and fan the sheets. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level
surface.

4. Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
Important
• Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
Note
• When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
Refer
• For details about loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and
Pre-Punched Paper (P.115)."

3 Using Your Printer 109

 5. Make sure that paper guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
Important
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Note
• When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by pinching
the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.

6. Insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.

Note
• If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.

7. When the [Tray 1 Settings] screen appears, tap [Paper Size].

Note
• Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the paper size or type setting is
different from the loaded paper.
8. Select the desired paper size, and then tap [OK].
9. Tap [Paper Type].
10. Select the desired paper type, and then tap [OK].

110 User Guide

3.7.3 Loading Print Media in the Bypass Tray
Important
• Do not add or remove print media when a print job is in progress from the bypass tray. This may result in a paper jam.
• Do not place objects on the bypass tray.
• Do not apply excessive force on the bypass tray or press it down.
Note
• If a jam occurs, feed one sheet at a time through the bypass tray.
• The label on the bypass tray shows how to load print media and envelopes for printing.

1. Gently pull and open the bypass tray cover.

Note
• Extend the extension tray as necessary.

2. Slide the width guides according to the paper size that you want to load.

3 Using Your Printer 111

 3. Load print media facing up with the top edge first.
Note
• Do not force the print media into the bypass tray.
• When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
Refer
• For details about loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and
Pre-Punched Paper (P.115)."

4. Make sure that both width guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
Important
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.

5. When the [Bypass Tray Settings] screen appears, tap [Paper Size].
6. Select the desired paper size, and then tap [OK].
7. Tap [Paper Type].
8. Select the desired paper type, and then tap [OK].

Loading Labels in the Bypass Tray

Note
• Do not load labels in the bypass tray together with other types of paper.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.
• Set the paper type to [Labels] from the print driver.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04") of the die-cut.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04") of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.

112 User Guide

3.7.4 Loading Envelopes
Important
• You can load envelopes only in the bypass tray and tray1.
• The label on the bypass tray shows how to load print media and envelopes for printing.
Note
• Use only freshly unpackaged and undamaged envelopes.
If you do not load envelopes right after they have been removed from the package, they may bulge. To avoid jams,
press firmly across the whole envelopes to flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes.

Feed direction

• Use only same size envelopes for a single print job.

• The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded is as follows:
- Tray1: Approximately 27.5 mm (1.08") (20 envelopes)
- Bypass Tray: Approximately 5 mm (0.19") (5 envelopes).
• If envelopes are still not fed correctly, curl the edge of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration. The amount
of the curl should be 5 mm (0.20") or less, 2 or 3 mm (0.08 or 0.12") is recommended. The area of the curl should be 8 to
10 mm (0.32 to 0.39") from the top edge of the envelopes. Do not curl the envelopes too much or make a crease.

Feed direction

2 or 3 mm
(0.08 or 0.12")

8 – 10 mm
(0.32 – 0.39")

• To confirm the correct orientation of envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Wizard in the print
driver.
You can print on envelopes as follows.

3 Using Your Printer 113

 1. Load the envelopes to the bypass tray or tray1.
2. Adjust the paper guides for tray1, or adjust the width guides for the bypass tray accordingly after
envelopes are loaded.
3. Select [Envelope] for the paper type, and then select the correct size of the envelopes from the print
driver.

Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL

Load the envelopes with the flaps closed and the print side facing up. Make sure that the flaps are on the left
side when you face towards the printer.

C5
 For envelopes with the flaps open:
Load the envelopes with the print side facing up. Make sure to load the bottom edge of the envelopes first.

 For envelopes with the flaps closed:

Load the envelopes with the print side facing up. Make sure to load the top edge of the envelopes first.

114 User Guide

3.7.5 Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and
Pre-Punched Paper
Letterhead, pre-printed, and pre-punched paper must be loaded the top edge first with the print side facing up
as shown in the following illustration.
Note
• Make sure that 2-sided printing is enabled, and [Paper Type] is set to [Letterhead], [Preprinted], or [Prepunched] on the
operator panel even when printing on a single side. You can also set the same setting using the print driver.

LET
LE
TT

TER
ER
HE

HE
AD

AD
3.7.6 Linking Trays
The printer links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in the trays. The first tray is
utilized until the print media runs out after which the next tray is used.
Note
• The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.
• The bypass tray can be linked if you specify the paper size and type on the operator panel.
After loading the same size and type of print media in the selected trays, select the appropriate paper type on
the operator panel for each tray.
To disable tray linking, change the paper type for one of the trays to a unique value.
Note
• If the same size but different types of print media are loaded, the printer links them only if the paper type is not
specified in the print driver or operator panel.

3 Using Your Printer 115

 3.8 Loading Documents
You can use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) or the document glass to load a document. Using
the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper at a time.
Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
Note
• To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).

3.8.1 Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic

Document Feeder (DADF)
The following instructions describe how to avoid paper jams.
• Do not use document smaller than 139.7 mm by 139.7 mm (5.5 inch by 5.5 inch) and larger than 215.9
mm by 355.6 mm (8.5 inch by 14 inch).
• Do not use booklets, pamphlets, photographs, transparencies, and documents having other unusual
characteristics.
• Do not use carbon or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased
paper, curled or rolled paper, and torn paper.
• Do not use documents with staples or paper clips.
• Do not use documents exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting
fluid.
• Do not use document that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not use wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled document.
• Do not mix different sizes, weights, or types of document in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF).
• Flex, fan, and straighten document before you load it.
• Do not overload the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). Make sure that the document stack
height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
• To prevent jams and multi-feed caused by misfeeding documents, wipe the DADF feed rollers and DADF
retard pad with a cloth moistened with water.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the DADF Feed Rollers and DADF Retard Pad (P.212)."
• Do not apply excessive pressure on the DADF cover or subject it to strong impact. Doing so may cause
paper jams.

116 User Guide

 1. Adjust the document guides according to the document size that you want to load, and place the
document(s) facing up with the top edge of the document(s) first into the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).

Important
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Note
• Before loading the document(s) in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), straighten the edges of the stack of
the document(s).
• Use the document stopper when copying a legal-size document.

3.8.2 Loading a Document on the Document Glass

CAUTION
• Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may break the glass and cause
injuries.
Note
• Make sure that no document is in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). If any document is detected in the
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), it takes priority over the document on the document glass.

1. Open the document cover.

3 Using Your Printer 117

 2. Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on
the top left corner of the glass.

3. Close the document cover.

Note
• Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.
• If you are copying/scanning/faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the
stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying/scanning/faxing with the
cover open.

118 User Guide

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning,
and Faxing

4.1 Printing............................................................................................................................ 120

4.2 Copying........................................................................................................................... 125
4.3 Scanning......................................................................................................................... 128
4.4 Faxing .............................................................................................................................. 143

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 119

 4.1 Printing
4.1.1 Printing from a Computer
Note
• Print settings made from a print driver have precedence over the menu settings made from the operator panel. For
details about a print driver feature, see the help of the print driver.
• When you use the AirPrint feature with a USB connection, you need to select the [Enable USB] check box on CentreWare
Internet Services. For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services
(P.99)."

The following procedure uses a typical Windows® and OS X program as an example.

1. Open the file you want to print.

2. From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3. Select the printer, and specify the print settings in the dialog box.
4. For Windows®, click [Preferences] to specify the desired settings, and then click [OK].
For OS X, proceed to step 5.
5. Click [Print].
Note
• You can switch the paper size loaded in the tray between A4 and letter. When you want to switch the page size, load the
print media of the selected size. For details about the settings, see "[A4/Letter Switch] (P.96)."

4.1.2 Canceling a Print Job

You can cancel a job using the operator panel or a computer.

Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel

 Canceling a Job While Print Is in Progress
1. Tap [Delete Job].
The print job in progress is canceled.
Note
• Subsequent print jobs are not canceled.

 Canceling a Job Before Printing Starts

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Jobs].

3. Tap [All Jobs] > [Print Jobs], and then select the job you want to cancel.

120 User Guide

 4. Tap [Delete Job].

Canceling a Job From a Computer

Refer
• For details about canceling a print job, see the help of your computer's operating system.

4.1.3 Stored Print

When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the print driver to store the job in the memory. When you
are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator panel to identify which job in the memory you
want to print.
Note
• The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
• The stored print feature is available when:
- The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.
- [RAM Disk] is set to [Installed] in the print driver.

Overview
The stored print feature includes the following job types. Read each description to select optimum job type for
your print job.

 Secure Print
You can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Only authorized users with
passwords can proceed the print job from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential
documents. Before printing, you can select the menu to delete or store the data after you print it.

Enter the password

from the operator Print data.
Send confidential data. panel.

Confidential

 Sample Set
You can print a single copy to verify the print quality after a collated print job has been stored in the memory. If
the print quality is good as expected, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents large number of
misprinted copies.

1
Print a single set.

Print the rest of sets.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 121

 Procedures for Printing Stored Jobs
Note
• The stored print feature is not available when a print job is too large for the available memory.
• The stored print feature is available when using the Printer Control Language (PCL) driver, PostScript 3 Compatible driver,
or Fuji Xerox Common Print Driver.

 Storing Print Jobs With the Print Driver

To use the stored print feature, you need to select [Secure Print] or [Sample Set] from [Job Type] in the
[Paper/Output] tab of the print driver. The job is stored in the memory until you print it from the operator panel,
or turn off the printer.
Refer
• For details about a print driver feature, see the help of the print driver.
Note
• You must specify a password for the Secure Print job.
• If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the print driver, the job's name is identified using the printer's
time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.

 Printing Stored Jobs

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Jobs].

3. Tap [Stored Print Jobs], and then select the job type.
Note
• If you have selected [Secure Print], enter the password.
• If you enter an invalid password, the message "Incorrect password. Re-enter it." appears. Tap [Close] to return to the
screen for entering the password.
4. Select the desired document, and specify the number of copies as needed.
Note
• For Secure Print, you can select [Delete after Printing] to delete the data in the memory after printing.
5. Tap [Print].
 Deleting Stored Jobs
1. Press the <Home> button.

122 User Guide

 2. Tap [Jobs].

3. Tap [Stored Print Jobs], and then select the job type.
Note
• If you have selected [Secure Print], enter the password.
4. Tap of the desired file, and then tap [Yes].

4.1.4 Printing From a USB Flash Drive

The USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB flash drive without using a computer.
Important
• To prevent damage to the printer, do not connect any device other than a USB flash drive to the front USB port of the
printer.
• Do not remove the USB flash drive from the front USB port while printing is in progress.
Note
• If [Service Lock] is set to [Lock with Passcode], you need to enter the four-digit password to use the function. If the
[Service Lock] setting for [USB Direct Print] is [Disable], the function is disabled and the menu is grayed out on the screen.
For details about this setting, see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."
• Only PDF/TIFF and JPEG files created using the scan function of the printer can be printed through the USB Direct Print
feature.
• Color printing is secured with a password if the [Service Lock] setting for [USB Direct Print] is set to [Lock Only Color with
Passcode]. If you set [Output Color] to [Color] and the [Service Lock] setting for [USB Direct Print] to [Lock Only Color with
Passcode], enter the four-digit password.

Supported USB Flash Drive

For the front USB port of the printer, you can use a USB flash drive with the following specification:
• USB 2.0/USB 1.1
• Type A connector
• Metal shielded
• FAT16/FAT32
Note
• If the USB flash drive is formatted in a file system other than the above, the printer may not detect the USB flash drive.
• A USB flash drive with authentication feature and some brands of USB flash drive cannot be used with this printer.

Supported File Formats

Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB flash drive:
• PDF
• TIFF
• JPEG

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 123

 Printing a PDF/TIFF or JPEG File in a USB Flash Drive
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Insert a USB flash drive to the front USB port of the printer.
3. Tap [PDF/TIFF Print] or [Photo Print (JPEG)].
4. Select the desired file, and then tap [OK].
Note
• The available file name depends on the language that you have selected on the touch panel. For details how to select
the desired language, see "Changing the Language (P.48)."
• Up to 10 PDF/TIFF or 100 JPEG files can be selected and printed in display order.
5. Tap , and then check and change the print settings.
Refer
• For details, see "Changing the Print Settings (P.124)."
6. Tap [Print].
Important
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become unusable.
7. Remove the USB flash drive from the printer.
Important
• Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive.

4.1.5 Changing the Print Settings

You can change most of the print settings from the program you are printing from. Changing the settings from
the program is prioritized over the default print settings.
Also, you can change the settings from:
• Print driver: Only applies to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.
• Operator panel: Becomes the user default.
The following procedure uses the operator panel as an example.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [App Defaults] > [USB Direct Print Settings].
Or
Tap [Device] > [Advanced Settings].

3. Tap the desired menu item.

4. Specify the desired setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.

124 User Guide

4.2 Copying
Note
• If [Service Lock] is set to [Lock with Passcode], you need to enter the four-digit password to use the function. If [Service
Lock] is set to [Disable], the function is disabled and the menu is grayed out on the screen. For details about this setting,
see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."
• Color copy is secured with a password if the [Service Lock] setting for [Copy] is set to [Lock Only Color with Passcode]. If
you set [Output Color] to [Color] and the [Service Lock] setting for [Copy] to [Lock Only Color with Passcode], enter the
four-digit password.

4.2.1 Making Copies From the Document Glass

Note
• Remove any documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) before copying from the document glass.
• Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For the best results, clean the
document glass before use. For details, see "Cleaning the Scanner (P.210)."

1. Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and then close the document cover.
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document on the Document Glass (P.117)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Copy].

4. Tap , and then specify the copy settings as needed.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Copy] (P.51)."
5. Tap the number on the keypad to specify the number of copies.
6. Tap [Start].
Note
• To cancel a copy job, tap [Delete Job] at any time while scanning a document.

4.2.2 Making Copies From the Duplex Automatic

Document Feeder (DADF)
CAUTION
• Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may break the glass and cause
injuries.
Important
• Do not load more than 50 sheets into the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) or allow more than 150 sheets to
be fed to the document output tray. Doing so may damage your documents.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 125

 1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
(P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Copy].

4. Tap , and then specify the copy settings as needed.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Copy] (P.51)."
5. Tap the number on the keypad to specify the number of copies.
6. Tap [Start].
Note
• To cancel a copy job, tap [Delete Job] at any time while scanning a document.

4.2.3 Making ID Card Copies

You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size.

1. Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and then close the document cover.
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document on the Document Glass (P.117)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [ID Card Copy].

4. Tap , and then specify the copy settings as needed.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[ID Card Copy] (P.53)."
5. To specify the number of copies, tap + or - right beside [Quantity], or tap [Quantity] and use the
keypad.

126 User Guide

 6. Tap [Start].
After the front of the ID card is scanned, the screen prompts you to turn over the card.
To copy the back of the ID card:
a Turn the ID card over.
b Tap [Start].
To stop the copy job:
a Tap [Delete Job].

4.2.4 Changing the Default Copy Settings

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [App Defaults] > [Copy Settings].
3. Tap the desired menu item.
4. Specify the desired setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 127

 4.3 Scanning
Note
• If [Service Lock] is set to [Lock with Passcode], you need to enter the four-digit password to use the function. If [Service
Lock] is set to [Disable], the function is disabled and the menu is grayed out on the screen. For details about this setting,
see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."

4.3.1 Overview
The printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning types: one is operated
from the printer when scanning, and the other from a computer.
The following illustration shows overview for each scanning type.

Operate From the Printer

"Scanning From the Printer With a USB Connection (Scan to PC) (P.129)"
Computer/ "Scanning From the Printer With a Network Connection (Scan to WSD)
Mobile Device (P.129)"
Operate From a Computer/Mobile Device
"Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using Web Services on Devices
(WSD) (P.131)"
"Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using the TWAIN Driver (P.131)"
"Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using the Windows® Image
Acquisition (WIA) Driver (P.132)"
Scan
FTP Server/ "Scanning From a Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct (P.133)"
Shared Folder
Operate From the Printer
"Storing Scanned Data to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP (Scan to
Network) (P.134)"

E-mail
Operate From the Printer
"Sending Scanned Data via E-mail (Scan to Email) (P.139)"

USB
Operate From the Printer
"Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) (P.138)"

The resolution setting to use when scanning depends on a document type and how you plan to use the scanned
data in your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.

Type Resolution
Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi

Scanning above the recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the program used when scanning.
To scan above the recommended resolutions, preview (or pre-scan) and crop the image to reduce the size before
scanning the image.

128 User Guide

4.3.2 Scanning From the Printer With a USB
Connection (Scan to PC)
Note
• You need to install the scanner driver and Print & Scan Hub (Windows® only) on your computer. For details about how to
install the software, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.28)" or "Installing Software for Mac OS X (P.31)."
• The scanned data is saved in the [Pictures] folder for Windows® or on the desktop for Mac OS X by default. With the
supplied program, you can change the saving location. For details, see "Understanding the Software of Your Printer
(P.155)."

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Scan to PC].

4. Tap the button under [File Format], and then select the file format you want to convert your scanned
document to.
5. Tap , and then specify the scan settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Scan to PC] (P.65)"
6. Tap [Start].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.

4.3.3 Scanning From the Printer With a Network

Connection (Scan to WSD)
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can send
scanned data to a computer.
Note
• This feature is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10.

Setting Up Web Services on Devices (WSD)

Set up the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 129

  Checking the Printer Setting
To use this scanning method, make sure that [WSD Scan] is enabled.
Refer
• For details about this setting, see "[Protocol] (P.84)"

 Setting Up a Computer
Note
• For Windows® 8.1 and Windows® 10, the computer automatically connects the printer using Web Services on Devices
(WSD). There is no need to install the printer manually.

1. Click [Start] > [Computer] > [Network].

2. Right-click the icon of the printer, and then click [Install].
The printer is connected to your printer using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
3. Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
4. Right-click the icon of the printer, and then click [Scan profiles].
5. Select the scanner, and then click [Edit].
6. Specify the various settings of the profile, including [Source] where the documents are loaded, and
then click [Save Profile].

Sending Scanned Data to a Computer

1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Scan to WSD].

4. Tap the button under [Destination].

5. Tap the name of the computer you want to send the scanned data to.
6. Tap the button under [Event], and then tap the desired scan event.
7. Tap [Start].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.

130 User Guide

4.3.4 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using
Web Services on Devices (WSD)
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can scan
documents from the computer.
Note
• This feature is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10.

Preparing to Scan from a Computer

Refer
• For details about preparations for scanning, see "Scanning From the Printer With a Network Connection (Scan to WSD)
(P.129)."

Scanning From a Computer

The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Start a computer, and then click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] >
[Devices and Printers].
3. Right-click the printer, and then select [Start scan].
4. Specify the scan settings as needed, and then click [Scan].
Note
• When you use Windows Vista®, use the drawing program such as Microsoft® Photo Gallery, select the printer connected
using the Web Services on Devices (WSD), and start scanning.

4.3.5 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using

the TWAIN Driver
With the TWAIN driver, you can import scanned data to a program such as Adobe® Photoshop®.
Note
• You need to install the scanner driver on your computer. For details about how to install the driver, see "Installing
Software for Windows® (P.28)."
• This feature driver is supported only on Windows®.
The following procedure uses a typical program that supports TWAIN as an example.

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Start a computer, and then start the graphic program that supports TWAIN, such as Adobe®
Photoshop®.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 131

 3. Select the scanner from the TWAIN menu on the graphic program, specify the necessary settings, and
then start scanning on the window.
Refer
• For details about operating the graphic program, see the manual supplied with the program.

4.3.6 Scanning From a Windows® Computer Using

the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA)
Driver
Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) is one of the standard components provided by Windows® XP or later
operating systems. The Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver allows you to scan documents without using
additional software.
With the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, you can import scanned data to Microsoft® programs such
as Windows® Photo Gallery and Microsoft® Paint.
Note
• You need to install the scanner driver on your computer. For details about how to install the driver, see "Installing
Software for Windows® (P.28)."
• This featureis is supported only on Windows®.

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Start a computer, and then start the drawing program, such as Microsoft® Paint for Windows®.
Note
• When using Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, use Windows® Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft® Paint.
• When using programs that utilize Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) 2.0, such as Windows® Fax and Scan on Windows
Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10, the [Feeder (Scan both sides)] option can be selected for duplex
scanning.
3. Click > [From scanner or camera].

4. Select your desired type of picture, and then click [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture].
5. Specify the properties settings, and then click [OK].
6. Click [Scan].

132 User Guide

4.3.7 Scanning From a Mac OS X Computer
You can scan documents using Image Capture that is a standard program for Mac OS X.
Note
• You need to install the scanner driver on your computer. For details about how to install the driver, see "Installing
Software for Mac OS X (P.31)."
• This feature is supported only on Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
The following procedure uses OS X 10.11 as an example.

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Start a computer, and then start Image Capture.
3. Click the printer name under [DEVICES] or [SHARED] on the left pane of the screen.
Note
• If the printer name is not displayed, mouse over the number displayed to the right of [DEVICES] or [SHARED], and then
click [Show Details].
4. Specify the scan settings as needed.
5. Click [Scan].
Refer
• For details about how to use lmage Capture, see the help of lmage Capture.

4.3.8 Scanning From a Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi

Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows your mobile devices to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct,
you can scan documents from your mobile devices directly without an access point or a wireless router.
Refer
• For details about how to set up and connect using Wi-Fi Direct, see "Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct (P.34)."
Note
• The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
• You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
• Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ
from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous
connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.
• The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols: LPD, Port9100, Web Services on Devices (WSD),
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, CentreWare Internet Services, TWAIN, Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA), and ICA.

Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct

The scanning procedure varies depending on the mobile device and the software you are using. See the manual
supplied with your mobile device or software to scan.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 133

 4.3.9 Storing Scanned Data to a Computer or Server
With SMB/FTP (Scan to Network)
Overview
The Scan to Network feature allows you to store scanned data to a shared folder on a computer or an FTP server.

Computer

FTP Server

Scan
Using FTP

Using SMB
Computer

 Required Operating Systems

For FTP:
• Windows®
Windows Server®
FTP service of Microsoft® Internet Information Services
• Mac OS X 10.7 or later operating systems
FTP service of Mac OS X
Note
• For details about how to configure the FTP service, see the manual supplied with the program.
• Windows Vista® supports IPv4 only.
For SMB:
This feature is supported on Windows Server® 2008 or later and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.

Overview for Storing to an FTP Server

The following is a typical setup flow for storing scanned data to an FTP server:

1. Register an FTP address in the address book.

Refer
• See "Registering Server Addresses (P.161)."
2. Store scanned data to an FTP server.
Refer
• See "Storing Scanned Data via Scan to Network (P.137)."

Overview for Storing to a Shared Folder Using SMB

The following is a typical setup flow for storing scanned data to a shared folder using SMB:

134 User Guide

 1. Set a user account.
Refer
• See "Setting a User Account (SMB Only) (P.135)."
2. Create a shared folder.
Refer
• See "Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only) (P.135)."
3. Register an SMB address in the address book.
Refer
• See "Registering Server Addresses (P.161)."
4. Store scanned data to a shared folder.
Refer
• See "Storing Scanned Data via Scan to Network (P.137)."

Setting a User Account (SMB Only)

To store scanned data to an SMB shared folder, it is necessary to have a shared folder on a computer. To create
a shared folder, a user account with a valid password is required.
Refer
• For details about a user account and password, see the help of your computer.

Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)

Create a shared folder to store the scanned data from the printer.

 For Windows®:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
Note
• "MyShare" is used as an example folder name in this procedure.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. Click the [Sharing] tab > [Advanced Sharing].

4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 135

 5. Enter a shared name in the [Share name] text box.
Note
• Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

6. Click [Permissions] to create a write permission for this folder.

7. Click [Add].
8. Select the user login name by performing either of the following:
• Click [Advanced], and then search the user login name.
• Enter the user login name in the [Enter the object names to select] text box, and then click [Check
Names].
"Myself" is used as an example login name in the following illustration.

9. Click [OK].
10. Click the user login name that you have just selected, and then select the [Allow] check box for [Full
Control].
This permits the document to be sent into this folder.
Important
• Do not use [Everyone] as the user login name.

136 User Guide

11. Click [OK].
Note
• To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:
Folder name: "MyShare," Second-level folder name: "MyPic," Third-level folder name: "John"
You should now see "MyShare\MyPic\John" in your directory.
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Registering Server Addresses (P.161)."

 For OS X:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
Note
• "MyShare" is used as an example folder name.
2. Click the created folder > [File] > [Get Info].
3. Select the [Shared folder] check box.
4. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Sharing].
5. Select the [File Sharing] check box, and then click [Options].
6. Select the [Share Files and folders using SMB] and account name check boxes.
7. Click [Done].
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Registering Server Addresses (P.161)."

Storing Scanned Data via Scan to Network

1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Scan to Network].

4. Tap .
5. Tap the desired address.
6. Make sure that the specified address is correct.
Note
• You can tap to check the detailed address information.
7. Tap the button under [File Format], and then select the file format you want to convert your scanned
document to.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 137

 8. Tap , and then specify the scan settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Scan to Network] (P.63)."
9. Tap [Start].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.

4.3.10 Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive

(Scan to USB Drive)
The Scan to USB Drive feature allows you to store scanned data directly to a USB flash drive attached to the
printer without using software.
Refer
• For details about a USB flash drive you can use with the printer, see "Supported USB Flash Drive (P.123)."

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Insert a USB flash drive into the front USB port of the printer.
4. Tap [Scan to USB Drive].
5. Tap to select the folder to save the scanned data in.
The default saving location is the root directory of the USB flash drive. If you do not specify the folder, skip
this step.
Note
• You cannot directly enter a folder path or create a new folder from the printer. You should always create a new folder
before connecting the USB flash drive to the printer.
6. Tap the button under [File Format], and then select the file format you want to convert your scanned
document to.
7. Tap , and then specify the scan settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[USB] (P.59)."
8. Tap [Start].
Important
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become unusable.
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.
• If the name of the scanned data already exists in the folder, the printer generates a new file name to save the data.
9. Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive, and then remove the drive from the
printer.

138 User Guide

4.3.11 Sending Scanned Data via E-mail (Scan to
Email)
The Scan to Email feature allows you to send scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
The following is a typical setup flow for sending scanned data via e-mail:

1. Have your e-mail account information ready at hand.

Refer
• See "Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account (P.139)."
2. Configure DNS server settings.
Refer
• See "Setting the DNS Server Address (P.139)."
3. Configure mail server settings.
Refer
• See "Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server (P.139)."

Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account

To send an e-mail from the printer, the following information is necessary:
• E-mail account (user account) information
• E-mail server information
Note
• For details about your e-mail account or the mail server, contact your network administrator or your Internet service
provider.
• When the printer is connected to the network via a proxy server, the printer may not be able to send the e-mail. In this
case, contact your network administrator.
• The following preparations are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not have to repeat the
settings whenever you send the e-mail.

Setting the DNS Server Address

To set the DNS server address to the printer, perform the following procedure:

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [TCP/IP] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Perform either of the following:
• If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:
Select the [Enabled] check box for [Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically] under [DNS].
• If you are setting TCP/IP manually:
Set [DNS Server Address] under [DNS].
4. Click [Apply].

Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server

To make the printer to send an e-mail, perform the following procedure:

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 139

 2. Click the [Properties] tab > [E-mail] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Specify the server settings.

Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
4. Click [Apply].
Note
• To send an e-mail with SSL/TLS encryption, you need to specify SSL/TLS settings in the printer. See "Using Digital
Certificates (P.168)."

Sending Scanned Data via Scan to Email

1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Scan to Email].

4. Enter the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.

Note
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the e-mail address. For details, see "Using the Address
Book (P.160)."

140 User Guide

 5. Make sure that the specified address is correct.
Note
• You can tap the address to check its detailed information as well as edit or delete the address from the displayed screen.
• To change an address type, tap the address, and then select [To] or [Bcc].
6. Tap the button next to , and then select the file format you want to convert your scanned
document to.
7. Tap , and then specify the scan settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Scan to Email] (P.57)."
8. Tap [Send].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.

4.3.12 Managing the Scanner (Windows®)

You can specify the port and password settings for scanning using the TWAIN driver.
Open the program that supports TWAIN, and then click [Settings] in the scanning window.

Port Settings
In the [Port Settings] tab, you can specify the connection method.
When the printer is connected to a computer directly by a USB cable, select [USB].
When the printer is connected to a network, select [Network], and then enter the IP address of the printer in the
[IP Address] text box, or search for the printer using the following methods:

[Access device by tracking change in Keeps track of the location of the printer by detecting a change of the IP
IP address] address.
[Search for all scanners on the Searches scanners in your network.
network]
[Search again] Searches scanners in your network again.
[Search Criteria] Displays the [Search Criteria] dialog box for setting the search condition. See
"[Search Criteria] Dialog Box (P.141)."

 [Search Criteria] Dialog Box

[Broadcast address] Enter the broadcast address.

• IPv4: Broadcast address such as "192.0.2.255"
• IPv6: Multicast address such as "ff02::1"
[Search Time] Specify a time period for searching a scanner.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 141

 [Community Name] Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. "public" is the default community
name.

Password Settings
In the [Password Settings] tab, you can set the password used to access the printer from your computer when
scanning.

4.3.13 Changing the Default Scan Settings

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [App Defaults] > [Scan Settings].
3. Tap the desired menu item.
4. Specify the desired setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.

142 User Guide

4.4 Faxing
Note
• If [Service Lock] is set to [Lock with Passcode], you need to enter the four-digit password to use the function. If [Service
Lock] is set to [Disable], the function is disabled and the menu is grayed out on the screen. For details about this setting,
see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."

4.4.1 Specifying the Fax Initial Settings

To use the fax function, you need to set the following menu items from the operator panel:
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the [General] menu. For details about this
setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."

• [Fax Number], [Country/Region], and [Company Name]

Press the <Home> button, and then tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings].
Note
• When you configure the country setting, the settings relevant to it is initialized.
• [Line Type]
Press the <Home> button, and then tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings].
If you use DRPD option, you can set DRPD Pattern here.
• [Receive Mode]
Press the <Home> button, and then tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] > [Incoming Fax
Settings].
• [Dial Type]
Press the <Home> button, and then tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax
Settings].
Refer
• For details about each menu, see "[Fax Settings] (P.75)."

4.4.2 Changing the Fax Settings

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap the desired menu item.
4. Specify the desired setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
Refer
• For details about available settings, "[Fax Settings] (P.75)."

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 143

 4.4.3 Sending a Fax
You can fax data from the printer.
Note
• If you receive an error message, tap [Close] to clear the message and send the document again.
Refer
• You can check a fax transmission result by viewing the [Jobs] screen or printing a confirmation report. For details, see "
[Jobs] (P.68)" or "[Fax Transmit] (P.79)."

Sending a Fax From Memory

1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Fax].

4. Tap , and then specify the fax settings as needed.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Fax] (P.55)."
5. Enter the fax number of the recipient using the keyboard.
Note
• Tapping recalls the last dialed fax number.
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the fax number. For details, see "Using the Address Book
(P.160)."
6. Make sure that the specified address is correct.
Note
• If you specified multiple addresses, you can tap the address to check its detailed information as well as delete the
address from the displayed screen.
7. Tap [Send].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.
• To cancel the fax job, tap [Delete Job] at any time while sending the fax.

Sending a Fax Manually

1. Load the document(s).
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.

144 User Guide

 3. Tap [Fax].

4. Tap , and then specify the fax settings as needed.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Fax] (P.55)."
5. Tap .
6. Enter the fax number of the recipient using the keyboard.
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.
• To cancel the fax job, tap [Delete Job] at any time while sending the fax.

Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer redials the number
every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
Refer
• For details about how to change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "[Auto Redial
Setup] (P.78)."
Note
• The printer does not redial a number when you send a fax manually.

4.4.4 Sending a Fax at a Specified Time (Delay

Send)
The Delay Send feature allows you to specify when to send your fax. This feature is useful for sending faxes
when communication charges are low, such as during night time.
Important
• After faxing in the delayed start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.

1. Load the document(s).

Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading Documents (P.116)."
2. Press the <Home> button.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 145

 3. Tap [Fax].

4. Tap > [Delay Send] > [Specific Time].

5. Specify the start time using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
6. Specify the other fax settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Fax] (P.55)."
7. Enter the fax number of the recipient using the keyboard.
Note
• Tapping recalls the last dialed fax number.
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the fax number. For details, see "Using the Address Book
(P.160)."
8. Make sure that the specified address is correct.
Note
• If you specified multiple addresses, you can tap the address to check its detailed information as well as delete the
address from the displayed screen.
9. Tap [Send].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.
• If you restart the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.

4.4.5 Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer

(Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer using the Printer Control Language (PCL) or fax driver.

Send data Send fax

PCL/fax driver Sending machine Receiving machine

(this printer) (fax machine/
multifunction printer)

Note
• Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
• The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending
on the program you are using.
• To use this feature, you must install the PCL driver for Windows® or the fax driver for OS X. For Windows®, see "Installing
Software for Windows® (P.28)." For OS X, see "Installing Software (P.31)."

1. Open the file you want to fax.

2. Open the print dialog box from the program.

146 User Guide

3. Perform either of the following:
• For Windows®:
a Select [FUJI XEROX DocuPrint CM315/318 z PCL 6], click [Preferences], and then select the [Paper/Output] tab.
b Select [Fax] from the [Job Type] drop-down list box.
c Select the [Fax] tab.

• For OS X:
a Select [Fax Setting].

4. Specify the fax transmission settings.

Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of the PCL or fax driver.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 147

 For Windows®:

For OS X:

5. Perform either of the following:

• For Windows®:
a Click [OK] to close the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, and then click [Print].
• For OS X:
a Click [Print].
6. Specify the destination.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the destination, see the help of the PCL or fax driver.

148 User Guide

 For Windows®:

For OS X:

7. Click [Start Sending].

4.4.6 Receiving a Fax

Note
• When the memory is full, you cannot receive a fax automatically. Delete any documents you no longer need from the
memory, or use an external telephone to receive a fax manually. For details, see "Receiving a Fax Manually (P.150)."

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes

Faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized, A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper.
Refer
• For details about how to load paper, see "Loading Print Media (P.107)."

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 149

 Receiving a Fax Automatically
To automatically receive a fax, set the fax receive mode to [FAX Mode], [TEL/FAX Mode], or [Ans/FAX Mode]. The
default setting is [FAX Mode].
Refer
• For details about the fax receive mode, see "[Receive Mode] (P.76)."
Note
• To use [TEL/FAX Mode] or [Ans/FAX Mode], connect an external telephone or an answering machine to the phone
connector on the rear of the printer. See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine (P.20)."

Receiving a Fax Manually

To manually receive a fax, set the fax receive mode to [TEL Mode] or [TEL/FAX Mode].
Refer
• For details about the fax receive mode, see "[Receive Mode] (P.76)."
Note
• To use [TEL Mode] or [TEL/FAX Mode], connect an external telephone to the phone connector on the rear of the printer.
See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine (P.20)."

 Using Remote Receive

You can manually receive a fax just by entering a specific receive code from an external telephone without
having to go to the printer.
Note
• To use this feature, set [Remote Receive] to [On]. For details about this setting, see "[Remote Receive] (P.78)"
• Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

1. When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.

2. Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then enter the remote receive code with the telephone.
Note
• When entering the remote receive code, press the number keys slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote fax machine, enter the two-digit code again.
• The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to a number of your choice. For details about
this setting, see "[Remote Receive] (P.78)."
3. Hang up the handset.
 Using On-Hook Dialing
You can manually receive a fax by tapping [Receive] on the touch panel.

1. When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.

2. Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Fax].

4. Tap [Receive].

150 User Guide

 5. Hang up the handset.

Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection

(DRPD)
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] > [DRPD Pattern].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
3. Tap the desired pattern.
Note
• The printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your telephone
company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
4. Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
Refer
• To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set [Receive Mode] to [DRPD Mode]. For details about this setting, see
"[Receive Mode] (P.76)."

Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. To restrict printing
out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended, turn on the secure receiving mode. In the secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes are stored in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored faxes are
printed.
Note
• To turn on the secure receiving mode, you need to enable [Panel Lock]. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock
(P.48)."

 Turning On the Secure Receiving Mode

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device] > [Security Settings].
3. Enter the password for [Panel Lock] using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
4. Tap [Secure Fax Receive].
5. Tap to display the check mark.
6. Enter a four-digit password using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, the printer stores it into memory and is displayed at
[Print Secure Fax] on the [Jobs] screen to let you know that there is a fax stored. See "[Jobs] (P.68)."

 Printing Received Faxes

1. Press the <Home> button.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 151

 2. Tap [Jobs] > [Print Secure Fax].
3. Enter a four-digit password using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
 Turning Off the Secure Receiving Mode
1. Follow the same steps 1 to 4 in "Turning On the Secure Receiving Mode (P.151)."
2. Tap to hide the check mark.

Receiving Faxes in the Memory

Since the printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you
receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, the printer stores incoming faxes in the
memory. And then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer starts
printing the fax.

Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Fax].

3. Tap .
4. Tap for [Polling Receive] to display the check mark.
5. Tap .
6. Enter the fax number of the recipient using the keyboard.
7. Tap [Retrieve].

4.4.7 Reports Related to Fax

The following reports may be useful when using fax:
Note
• For details about other reports and how to print a report, see "[Information Pages] (P.70)."

[Address Book] Prints a list of fax numbers registered in the address book.
[Fax Activity] Prints information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
[Stored Fax List] Prints the status of pending faxes.

4.4.8 Changing the Default Fax Settings

1. Press the <Home> button.

152 User Guide

2. Tap [Device] > [App Defaults] > [Fax Settings].
3. Tap the desired menu item.
4. Specify the desired setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.

4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 153

 5 Know Your Printer

5.1 Understanding the Software of Your Printer ................................................... 155

5.2 Auditron.......................................................................................................................... 157
5.3 Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization ............................................................... 158
5.4 Using the Address Book ........................................................................................... 160
5.5 Using Digital Certificates......................................................................................... 168
5.6 Understanding Printer Messages ......................................................................... 175

154 User Guide

5.1 Understanding the Software of Your
Printer
5.1.1 Overview
Use the "Software/Product Manual" disc to install the following software for maximum effectiveness.

Print & Scan Hub (Windows®)

Note
• It is supported on Windows® Vista or later.
Print & Scan Hub is an information portal of your printer, which consolidates the printer management, scan and
print supporting functions, and cloud connectivity.
With Print & Scan Hub, you can conveniently check your printer and consumables status, perform scan settings
and scan jobs, and edit scanned data as needed. Also, you can specify the destination to store the scanned data
in your computer or in the network.
Note
• If you log in to [Cloud Service Hub] which connects to the cloud storage service, you can also specify the destination in it.
Refer
• For details about [Cloud Service Hub], see the following web site.
https://cloudservicehub.fujixerox.com
In addition to the above, you can also search files with Print & Scan Hub, and print or scan the data as needed.
To start Print & Scan Hub, click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Fuji Xerox Print & Scan Hub] > [Print & Scan Hub].

Note
• If the printer is connected to the network, the printer status is displayed on CentreWare Internet Services.
If the printer is connected with a USB cable, the printer status is displayed on a popup window.
To start CentreWare Internet Services or open the popup window:
1 Click [Device Management] on the main screen.
2 Click [Device Status].
Refer
• For details about CentreWare Internet Services, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

5 Know Your Printer 155

 Address Book Editor (Windows® and Mac OS X)
The Address Book Editor allows you to register the contact information such as fax number and e-mail address.
Refer
• For details about how to start the address book editor, see "Using the Address Book (P.160)."

Express Scan Manager (Mac OS X)

You can change the location to save the scanned data using the Express Scan Manager.
To start Express Scan Manager, click [Finder] > [Applications] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Utilities], and then double-click
[Express Scan Manager].

5.1.2 Updating Software

Software and firmware updates are available on the web site below.
http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/

156 User Guide

5.2 Auditron
Auditron contains an authentication function that can set limits on what processes can be used, as well as an
account management that can be used to control usage based on authentication.
The following illustration shows how the printer works with Auditron.

Registered user A Registered user B

Can print up to
10,000 pages in black Can print up to 9,000 pages
and white in color or black and white

Cannot print if not a

registered user, or if the
printed pages exceeds the
limit

Print account report Reference account report

for each registered user

Normal user D System administrator C

Note
• You can configure the printer's Auditron settings with CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, see the help
of CentreWare Internet Services.
• To print using Auditron, you need to set the print driver. For more information, see the help of the print driver.

5 Know Your Printer 157

 5.3 Multiple Desktop - Tile
Customization
The [Home] screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your preference or work style.
For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that you can easily access the
tiles you often use.

The tiles on the [Home] screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs on the printer, like "taking seven copies of the
handouts for the weekly meeting in two-sided color copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned
data to my boss by e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer changes the settings of
the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile.

5.3.1 Adding a New Tile

You can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new customized tile which includes
specific settings for copy, ID card copy, fax, and some scan jobs. Up to 42 tiles can be placed in your [Home]
screen.

Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles

The printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings.

1. On the [Home] screen, tap [Home ] > [Customize] > [Add].

Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
2. Tap the tile you want to add to your [Home] screen, and then tap [Done].

Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings

You may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can create the tile including
those job settings and save it in your [Home] screen.

 Creating Your Custom Tile

The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing or scanning, follow the same procedures on the job settings
screen of each job.

158 User Guide

 1. Tap the [Copy] tile in your [Home] screen.

2. Tap to change the copy settings.

Refer
• For details about this setting, see "[Copy] (P.51)."
3. Tap [Copy ] > [Save as New App].
4. Tap the [Enter an app name] text box, and then enter the name of your settings.
5. Tap [Next].
6. Tap the color tile and image icon you want to set as your custom tile.
7. Tap [Done].
Note
• When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the Panel Lock setting. To enable the function, you need to
enter the password. For details about this setting, see "Panel Lock (P.48)."
• When you save the job settings for [Fax] or [Scan to Email] as a custom tile, recipient information is saved together with
the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients, make sure that the fax numbers or e-mail
addresses of the recipients displayed on the touch panel are correct.

 Editing Your Custom Tile

You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile.

1. Tap the tile you want to edit in your [Home] screen.

2. Change the job settings as needed.
3. Tap the tile name, and then tap [Save as New Default].
4. Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings.
5. Tap [Next].
6. Tap the color tile and image icon if you want to change the color and image of the tile.
7. Tap [Done].

5 Know Your Printer 159

 5.4 Using the Address Book
The address book is a feature used for storing destinations for later use. Fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and SMB
or FTP server addresses can be registered as destinations from the operator panel, CentreWare Internet Services,
and Address Book Editor. If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can also search the server for fax
numbers or e-mail addresses, and then specify them when sending scanned data.

5.4.1 Address Features Available in the Address

Book
The address book has two types of address features.
• Personal Address
Normally use this feature to register a destination in the address book. Both a fax number and e-mail
address can be assigned in one destination.
• Group Address
Enables you to select multiple destinations from those registered in the address book and put them
together as a single group. This feature is useful when you want to send the same document to multiple
destinations at one time.
Note
• Server addresses cannot be registered as a group address.
• You cannot include a group address in another group address.

5.4.2 Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The ways to register destinations differ depending on their types; fax and e-mail destinations can be registered
from the operator panel of the printer, while server destinations from CentreWare Internet Services. The bundled
program, Address Book Editor, allows you to handle all types of destinations, including the ones used when
sending a fax from a computer.

Registering Fax Numbers/E-mail Addresses

This section describes how to register fax/e-mail destinations from the operator panel of the printer or the
Address Book Editor.

 Using the Operator Panel

Registering a Personal Address
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Address Book].
3. Tap [+] > [Add Contact].
4. Tap the [Name] text box.
5. Enter a name using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
The specified name is also automatically entered in the box under the [Name] text box as an index name.
Tap the box if you want to rename the index.
Note
• The registered destinations are listed by index name in the address book.
6. Tap the [Enter an Email address.] text box.
If you do not register an e-mail address, proceed to step 8.

160 User Guide

 7. Enter an e-mail address using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
8. Tap the [Enter a fax number.] text box.
If you do not register a fax number, proceed to step 10.
9. Enter a fax number using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
10. If you want to register this address as favorites, tap . If not, skip this step.
Note
• Once you register a destination as favorites, you can easily and quickly select it from the favorites list in the address book.
11. Tap [OK].
Registering a Group Address
1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Address Book].
3. Tap [+] > [Add Group].
4. Tap [Email] or [Fax] to select the type of the group address.
5. Tap the [Enter a group name.] text box.
6. Enter a group name using the keyboard, and then tap [OK].
The specified name is also automatically entered in the box under the [Enter a group name.] text box as
an index name. Tap the box if you want to rename the index.
Note
• The registered destinations are listed by index name in the address book.
7. Tap [Add Member].
8. Tap all the addresses you want to register as the group address, and then tap [OK].
9. If you want to register this address as favorites, tap . If not, skip this step.
Note
• Once you register a destination as favorites, you can easily and quickly select it from the favorites list in the address book.
10. Tap [OK].
 Using Address Book Editor
For Windows®:
1. Click [Start] > [Fuji Xerox DocuPrint CM31x z] > [Address Book Editor].
2. Specify the destination settings.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of the Address Book Editor.
For OS X:
1. Click [Go] > [Applications] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Utilities], and then double-click [Address Book Editor].
2. Specify the destination settings.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of the Address Book Editor.

Registering Server Addresses

This section describes how to register SMB or FTP server destinations from CentreWare Internet Services or the
Address Book Editor.

5 Know Your Printer 161

  Using CentreWare Internet Services
1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Address Book] tab.

If a security login dialog box appears, enter an administrator name and password.
Note
• "11111" and "x-admin" are the default administrator name and password.
3. Click [Add].

162 User Guide

 The [Add Network Scan Address] page appears.

4. Specify the destination settings.

Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
5. Click [Apply].
 Using Address Book Editor
For Windows®:
1. Click [Start] > [Fuji Xerox DocuPrint CM31x z] > [Address Book Editor].
2. Specify the destination settings.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of the Address Book Editor.
For OS X:
1. Click [Go] > [Applications] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Utilities], and then double-click [Address Book Editor].
2. Specify the destination settings.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of the Address Book Editor.

5.4.3 Specifying Destinations From the Address

Book
This section describes how to specify fax and e-mail destinations using the address book.
Note
• For details about how to specify server addresses, see "Storing Scanned Data via Scan to Network (P.137)."

1. Press the <Home> button.

5 Know Your Printer 163

 2. Tap [Fax] or [Scan to Email].

3. Tap .
4. Tap the desired address.
Note
• indicates a personal address, and indicates a group address.
• The following keys help you find your desired address.
- displays only favorites addresses.
- enables you to find the address by the search keyword you are entering.
5. Tap [Send] or [OK].

5.4.4 Using the Address Book in an LDAP Server

You can search and specify fax numbers or e-mail addresses registered in an external LDAP server. To access the
server from the printer, you need to register the server settings in the printer using CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, contact your system administrator.

Preparing to Access an LDAP Server

Set the following items using CentreWare Internet Services.
• Authentication type
• LDAP server address
• LDAP attribute names
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."

164 User Guide

 Setting an Authentication Type
1. Click the [Properties] tab > [Authentication System] on the left pane of the screen.

2. In the [Authentication System Settings] drop-down list box under [Authentication Type], select
[LDAP] as the authentication method, and then click [Apply].
Note
• When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select [Kerberos (Windows)] as the authentication
method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter the information in [Kerberos Server] on the
left pane of the screen. See the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
3. Click [Restart].
 Setting the LDAP Server Address
Note
• When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, you need to specify SSL/TLS settings in the printer.
See "Using Digital Certificates (P.168)."

1. Click the [Properties] tab > [LDAP Server] on the left pane of the screen.

5 Know Your Printer 165

 2. Specify the server settings.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the settings, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
3. Click [Apply].
4. Click [Restart].
 Setting the LDAP Attribute Names
1. Click the [Properties] tab > [LDAP User Mapping] on the left pane of the screen.

2. Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server.

Note
• If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP server, leave the settings in this step as they are by default.
3. Click [Apply].
4. Click [Restart].

Specifying Destinations From an LDAP Server

Note
• To specify destinations from an LDAP server, you need to enable [LDAP Address Book]. See "[LDAP Address Book] (P.97)."

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Fax] or [Scan to Email].

166 User Guide

3. Tap .
Note
• If the [Select Address Book] screen is displayed, tap [LDAP Address Book].
4. Enter a search keyword using the keyboard, and then tap [Search].
5. Tap the desired address, and then tap [OK].
6. Tap [Send].

5 Know Your Printer 167

 5.5 Using Digital Certificates
The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates.
The printer supports the following digital certificate formats.
• PKCS#12
HTTPS, Wi-Fi (WPA-Enterprise)
• PKCS#7 (for CSR)
HTTPS
Refer
• For details about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages (P.175)" and "Digital Certificate Problems
(P.262)."
The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.

Prepare to manage digital certificates.

• Set HTTPS Communication

Import and set digital certificates.

• Import a Digital Certificate
• Set a Digital Certificate
• Check the Settings of a Digital Certificate

Set various security features using digital certificates.

5.5.1 Managing Certificates

This section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows:
• "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication (P.168)"
• "Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) (P.169)"
• "Importing a Digital Certificate (P.169)"
• "Setting a Digital Certificate (P.169)"
• "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate (P.170)"
• "Deleting a Digital Certificate (P.170)"
• "Exporting a Digital Certificate (P.171)"

Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication

Before managing digital certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Select the [Enabled] check box for [SSL/TLS Server Communication], and then click [Apply].
4. Click [Restart].

168 User Guide

Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Note
• To download a CSR from the printer, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use HTTPS
Communication (P.168)."

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Click [Certificate Signing Request (CSR)].
4. Specify each item of certificate signing request, and then click [Apply New Settings].
5. Check the settings of certificate signing request, and then click [Download].
6. Save a CSR file to your computer.
Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority.

Importing a Digital Certificate

Important
• Before importing a certificate file, backup the certificate file.
Note
• To import digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
(P.168)."
• Make sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.
• After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
4. Enter a password.
Note
• The password is not necessary when importing a PKCS#7 format certificate, which has the filename extension of p7b.
5. Re-enter the password.
6. Click [Browse] of [File Name], and then select the file to be imported.
7. Click [Import].

Setting a Digital Certificate

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Click [Certificate Management].
4. Perform the following:
To set a Wireless LAN (Server) certificate, select [Trusted Certificate Authorities] from the [Category] list.

5 Know Your Printer 169

 To set a certificate of SSL/TLS Server, SSL/TLS Client, or Wireless LAN (Client), select [Local Device].
5. Select the purpose of use from the [Certificate Purpose] list.
6. Click [Display the List].
Note
• If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click [Next] to display the next page.
7. Select the certificate to associate.
Make sure that [*Valid] is displayed in the [Validity] column for the selected certificate.
8. Click [Certificate Details].
9. Check the content, and then click [Use this certificate] at the upper-right corner.

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Click [Certificate Management].
4. Specify the conditions for displaying a certificate you want to confirm.
For example, to display a certificate that is issued by a trusted certificate authority, select [Trusted
Certificate Authorities] from the [Category] list.
5. Click [Display the List].
Note
• If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click [Next] to display the next page.
The certificate displayed with an asterisk as [*Valid] in the [Validity] column is the certificate associated
with the purpose of use and currently used.

Deleting a Digital Certificate

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Click [Certificate Management].
4. Specify the conditions for displaying a certificate you want to delete.
For example, to display a certificate that is issued by a trusted certificate authority, select [Trusted
Certificate Authorities] from the [Category] list.
5. Click [Display the List].
Note
• If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click [Next] to display the next page.
6. Select the certificate to be deleted, and then click [Certificate Details].
7. Click [Delete] at the upper-right corner.
Note
• When a certificate is deleted, the features associated with the deleted certificate are disabled. To delete a certificate
being used, either set the feature to OFF in advance or switch the association to another certificate, and then switch to
another operation mode if possible before deleting the certificate.

170 User Guide

 • For an SSL/TLS Server, sets the HTTP-SSL/TLS and IPPS communication to OFF.
• For an SSL/TLS Client, set the LDAP-SSL/TLS, SMTP-SSL/TLS, and IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) setting to OFF.
• For wireless LAN, change the wireless security setting to other than WPA-Enterprise before deleting the
certificate.

Exporting a Digital Certificate

Note
• Since the secret key is not exported, an imported PKCS#12 format certificate can be exported only as a PKCS#7
certificate.

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Specify the conditions for displaying a certificate you want to export.
For example, to display a certificate that is issued by a trusted certificate authority, select [Trusted
Certificate Authorities] from the [Category] list.
4. Click [Display the List].
Note
• If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click [Next] to display the next page.
5. Select the certificate to be exported, and then click [Certificate Details].
6. Click [Export this certificate].

5.5.2 Setting the Features

You can set various security features using digital certificates.
• "Setting the SSL/TLS-Use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP) (P.171)"
• "Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication (P.172)"
• "Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication (P.172)"
• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS) (P.172)"
• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP) (P.173)"

Setting the SSL/TLS-Use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)

1. Import the certificate to be used with the SSL/TLS-use server.
Refer
• See "Importing a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
2. Set the certificate to be used with the SSL/TLS-use server.
Refer
• See "Setting a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
3. Make sure that the certificate is set correctly.
Refer
• See "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate (P.170)."
Note
• Check that the newly set certificate, not the self-signed certificate, is associated.

5 Know Your Printer 171

 4. After restarting the printer, the certificate set as described above is used as the server certificate
when executing communication with HTTP/IPP-SSL/TLS.

Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Select the desired connection method from the [SMTP - SSL/TLS Communication] drop-down list box.
4. Click [Apply].
The printer is restarted to enable the settings.

Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication

1. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
2. Click the [Properties] tab > [SSL/TLS Server Communication] on the left pane of the screen.
3. Select the [Enabled] check box for [LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication].
4. Click [Apply].
The printer is restarted to enable the settings.

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)

Note
• To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
(P.168)."
• WPA-Enterprise is available only when [Infrastructure] is selected from the [Network Type] drop-down list box.
• Make sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.
• After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.

1. Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
Refer
• See "Importing a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
2. Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
Refer
• See "Setting a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
3. Make sure that the certificate is set correctly.
Refer
• See "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate (P.170)."
4. Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (client or client certificate).
Refer
• See "Importing a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
5. Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (client or client certificate).
Refer
• See "Setting a Digital Certificate (P.169)."

172 User Guide

 6. Make sure that the certificate is set correctly.
Refer
• See "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate (P.170)."
7. Set WPA-Enterprise for EAP-TLS.
a Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
b Click the [Properties] tab > [Wi-Fi] on the left pane of the screen.
c Select [WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES] from the [Encryption] drop-down list box of [Security Settings].
Note
• [WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES] becomes available only when the following steps are set correctly.
- Importing a Digital Certificate
- Setting a Digital Certificate
- Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate
d Set [EAP-Identity] of [WPA-Enterprise].
e Select [EAP-TLS] from the [Authentication Method] drop-down list box of [WPA-Enterprise].
f Click [Apply].

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2,

EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)
Note
• To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
(P.168)."
• WPA-Enterprise is available only when [Infrastructure] is selected from the [Network Type] drop-down list box.
• Make sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.
• After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.

1. Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
Refer
• See "Importing a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
2. Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
Refer
• See "Setting a Digital Certificate (P.169)."
3. Make sure that the certificate is set correctly.
Refer
• See "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate (P.170)."
4. Set WPA-Enterprise for PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, or EAP-TTLS CHAP.
a Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
b Click the [Properties] tab > [Wi-Fi] on the left pane of the screen.
c Select [WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES] from the [Encryption] drop-down list box of [Security Settings].
Note
• [WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES] becomes available only when the following steps are set correctly:
- Importing a Digital Certificate
- Setting a Digital Certificate
- Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate
d Set [EAP-Identity], [Login Name], and [Password] of [WPA-Enterprise].

5 Know Your Printer 173

 e Select one of the following from the [Authentication Method] drop-down list box of [WPA-Enterprise]:
• [PEAPV0 MS-CHAPV2]
• [EAP-TTLS PAP]
• [EAP-TTLS CHAP]
f Click [Apply].

174 User Guide

5.6 Understanding Printer Messages
The operator panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible
printer problems you must resolve. This chapter provides a list of status codes, and informs you what you can do
to clear error messages. When you contact customer support about an error, have the status codes and
messages ready.
Important
• When an error occurs, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the
printer may be corrupted.
Note
• A status code is listed in an error message.
• For status codes that are not listed in this chapter, see instructions in each error messages.

Status-Code What you can do

004-310 Turn off the printer. Make sure that the tray is correctly installed, and then turn on
the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
005-121 Open the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) cover and remove the
jammed documents.
010-397 An error has occurred in the fusing unit. Turn off the printer, and then turn it on
again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-338 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again. Contact your system administrator if
this failure is repeated.
016-404 The certificate DB is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Tap {OK} to start
initialization, and then restart the printer.
Refer
• For details, see "Digital Certificate Problems (P.262)."
016-405 Security setting mismatch. Initialize the security setting, and then restart the
printer by turning off the printer and then on again. Contact your system
administrator for the security resetting.
016-503 Unable to resolve the e-mail SMTP server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the SMTP server and DNS server
are set correctly.
016-504 Unable to resolve the e-mail POP3 server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the user name and password for
the POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-505 A login error has occurred when accessing a POP3 server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the user name and password
used for POP3 server are set correctly.
016-506 The SMTP or POP3 server settings are not configured. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Configure the SMTP or POP3 server settings.
016-507 A login error has occurred when accessing an SMTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for
60 seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the user name and password
used for SMTP server are set correctly.
016-520 The certificate of the printer is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Reset
the certificate from other connectable clients with CentreWare Internet Services. If
no device can be connected, disconnect the Ethernet cable, turn off the IPsec, and
then reset the certificate with CentreWare Internet Services.
016-521 The certificate of the destination client is invalid. Contact your system
administrator. Check the certificate of the destination client and reset.

5 Know Your Printer 175

 Status-Code What you can do
016-522 A client certificate does not exist in the printer. Ask your system administrator to
import the client certificate.
016-523 The server certificate data is incorrect. Ask your system administrator to check the
root certificate of the server certificate.
016-524 The validity period of the server certificate has expired. Ask your system
administrator to change the certificate to a valid one.
016-527 An authentication internal error has occurred when accessing an LDAP server.
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-530 An authentication error has occurred when accessing an LDAP server. Turn off the
printer, and then turn it on again. Check the access settings for the authentication
server and try again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-541 A wireless certificate of the server or client cannot be correctly referenced while
using Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system
administrator to connect the printer with a wired network, initialize the wireless
settings, import the wireless certificate, and then set WPA-Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.
016-542 A server certificate error has occurred when acquiring the certificate with the
operation of WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. This is a problem in the server
certificate, such as the validity period has expired for the server certificate being
used with the Radius server. Ask your system administrator to check the server
certificate being used with the Radius server.
016-543 A wireless certificate of the server or client corruption error has occurred while
using the Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system
administrator to connect the printer with a wired network, initialize the wireless
settings, import the wireless certificate, and then set WPA-Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.
016-718 An error occurs when there is insufficient memory to print. The print job is canceled
and deleted. Reduce the data size of the print job, or the RAM disk size when using
the RAM disk.
Refer
• For details about the RAM disk feature, see "[RAM Disk] (P.96)."
016-720 An unsupported Page Description Language (PDL) is included. Use supported print
drivers.
Refer
• For details about how to install the print drivers, see "Installing Software
for Windows® (P.28)" and "Installing Software for Mac OS X (P.31)."
016-757 The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.
016-758 The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.
016-759 Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.
016-764 An error occurs when the printer connected to the SMTP server. Tap [Close], or wait
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the SMTP server settings or contact
the SMTP server administrator.
016-765 The capacity of the SMTP server is not enough. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds
for the printer to recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-766 The e-mail exceeds the SMTP server size restriction. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-767 The e-mail address of the recipient is incorrect. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds
for the printer to recover. Check the e-mail address, and then try scanning again.

176 User Guide

Status-Code What you can do
016-768 The e-mail address of the sender is incorrect. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check the e-mail address, and then try scanning again.
016-786 A timeout error occurs when sending or receiving scanned data. Tap [Close], or wait
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is
connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable, contact server
administrator.
016-790 Network connection error. IP address is not determined. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is connected
properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable, contact server
administrator.
016-799 Tap [Close] to clear the message and cancel the current print job. Check the
configuration of the printer in the print driver.
016-930 The device is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.
016-931 The USB hub is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.
016-985 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Retry scanning by
016-986 lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the scanned data.

024-965 Make sure that the size and type specified in the tray settings matches the size and
024-966 type of paper loaded in the tray.

024-969
026-721 Check your USB flash drive.
• The file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB flash drive.
• Your USB flash drive is not write-protected.
027-446 Change the IPv6 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and then turn it
on again.
027-452 Change the IPv4 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and then turn it
on again.
031-521 SMB server login error. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check login-able computer with your system administrator.
031-522 SMB server login error. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if login name (domain name and user name) and password are correct.
031-523 Invalid SMB share name. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check the share name you specified.
031-524 Exceeded the SMB server user account limit. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check the number of users who use the server at the same
time is not exceeding the upper limit.
031-525 SMB destination client permission error. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage
location.
031-526 Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination
server is registered with DNS.
031-527 Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server
address as IP address.

5 Know Your Printer 177

 Status-Code What you can do
031-528 Unable to connect to the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the printer can communicate via network with the
forwarding destination SMB server. For example, check the following.
• Connection of an Ethernet cable
• TCP/IP setting
• Communication with Port 137 (UDP), 138 (UDP), and 139 (TCP).
For communication beyond the subnet, contact your system administrator.
031-529 SMB server login error. Password is invalid. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check if password is correct.
031-530 The SMB share folder was not found on the specified SMB server. Tap [Close], or
wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following.
• The storage location is correct.
• The file name you specified can be used when creating a file on the SMB server.
• The DFS setting is correct. The SMB server, share name, and storage location are
directly specified according to the checked settings.
031-531 Unable to get a file or folder name on the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Check access right of the folder you specified.
031-532 SMB scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or
move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.
031-533 Unable to write a file in the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check the following.
• The file name you specified is not used by other users.
• A file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-534 Unable to create a folder on the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check the following.
• The file name you specified is not used by other users.
• A file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-535 Unable to delete a file on the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if other user is not operating the file.
031-536 Unable to delete a folder on the SMB server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check if other user is not operating the folder.
031-537 SMB server capacity exceeded. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-539 The specified SMB server is invalid. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the server name is correct.
031-540 The specified domain name is invalid. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the domain name is correct.
031-541 The specified user name is invalid. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer
to recover. Check if the user name is correct.
031-542 TCP/IP not initialized. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Wait for a while and try the same operation again. Contact the customer support if
this failure is repeated.
031-543 SMB server login error. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check login permitted time with your system administrator.
031-544 SMB server login error. Password is expired. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check the password valid period with your system
administrator.

178 User Guide

Status-Code What you can do
031-545 SMB server login error. Password is to be changed. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Check necessity of password change with your
system administrator.
031-546 SMB server login error. Invalid user is specified. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds
for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination
server settings.
031-547 SMB server login error. User restricted from accessing the SMB server is specified.
Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system
administrator for the destination server settings.
031-548 SMB server login error. Logon time of SMB destination is expired. Tap [Close], or
wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator
for the destination server settings.
031-549 SMB server login error. Specified user is restricted, and a null password is
prohibited. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. On server
security settings, check access permission of null password user.
031-550 The APPEND command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the
SMB server. Check if the server supports the APPEND command.
031-551 The RENAME command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the
SMB server. Check if the server supports the RENAME command.
031-552 Job canceled. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change
the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-574 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding
destination server is registered with DNS.
031-575 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server
address as IP address.
031-576 Unable to connect to the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination
FTP server. For example, check connection of Ethernet cable and if the IP address
of the server is correct.
031-578 FTP server login error. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if the login name (user name) and password are correct.
031-579 Invalid FTP subdirectory path. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the storage location is correct.
031-580 Failed to obtain a file or folder name of the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Check the server access right.
031-581 FTP scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Change the file name and forwarding destination folder, or
move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.
031-582 Unable to write a scan file to the FTP server location. Tap [Close], or wait for 60
seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the file name you specified can be
created in storage location. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-584 Unable to create a scan folder on the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds
for the printer to recover. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in
storage location. Check if the folder that has the same name as the one you
specified already exists.

5 Know Your Printer 179

 Status-Code What you can do
031-585 Unable to delete a file on the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check server access rights.
031-587 Unable to delete a folder on the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check server access rights.
031-588 Unable to write a file to the FTP server. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-590 Job canceled. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change
the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-594 The TYPE command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this
failure is repeated.
031-595 The PORT command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this
failure is repeated.
031-598 The APPEND command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the
FTP server. Check if the server supports the APPEND command.
031-599 The PNFR command error has occurred. Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename a file on the FTP
server. Check if the server supports the PNFR command.
033-513 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover, and then perform the
following.
• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
• Print the fax job stored using the secure receiving mode.
Refer
• For details, see "Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode (P.151)."
033-762 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. The printer rejects
faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
033-776 The size of the fax document data is too large and may have exceeded the space
available in memory. Lower the scan resolution rate, and then try scanning again.
Refer
• For details, see "[Resolution] (P.56)."
033-788 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover, and then perform the
following.
• Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
• Print the fax job stored using the secure receiving mode.
Refer
• For details, see "Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode (P.151)."
034-515 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover, and then perform the
following.
• Try the same operation.
• Check the printer or remote fax machine if the memory is full.

180 User Guide

Status-Code What you can do
034-791 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the telephone
cable is connected properly. If the line connection is correct, check the following.
• If the dialing type setting is correct.
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.78)."
If the dialing type setting is correct, check the following.
• The remote fax machine can receive a fax.
035-701 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following.
• Status of the remote fax machine
• Dialing type setting
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.78)."
035-708 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover, and then perform the
following.
• Try the same operation.
• Reduce the modem speed.
Refer
• For details, see "[Modem Speed] (P.79)."
035-717 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Reduce the modem
speed.
Refer
• For details, see "[Modem Speed] (P.79)."
035-718 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the status of the
remote fax machine.
035-720 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the features of
the remote fax machine.
035-781 Tap [Close], or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the remote
fax machine is busy.
042-700 Wait for a while until the printer cools down, and then restart the printer. Contact
customer support if this failure is repeated.
077-301 Close the right side cover.
077-304 Close the rear cover.
091-911 Remove the used waste toner box, and then install a new toner box.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Box (P.197)."
091-913 Remove the used drum cartridge of the specified color, and then install a new
091-932 cartridge.

091-933 Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
091-934

5 Know Your Printer 181

 Status-Code What you can do
091-914 Reinsert the drum cartridge of the specified color. If the message remains, replace
the cartridge.
091-915
091-917 Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
091-918
091-919
091-920
091-922
091-923
091-921 Make sure that the drum cartridge of the specified color is fully installed.
091-927 Refer
091-928 • For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."

091-929
091-960 Remove the unsupported drum cartridge of the specified color, and then install a
supported drum cartridge.
091-961
091-962 Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
091-963
092-310 Turn off the printer. Clean the Color Toner Density (CTD) sensor with a clean dry
cotton swab, and then turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure
is repeated.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor (P.201)."
093-925 Turn off the printer. Make sure that toner cartridge of the specified color is
correctly installed, and then turn on the printer. The status code differs depending
093-928
on the color of the toner cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is
093-950 repeated.
093-951 Refer
093-952 • For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
093-980
093-981
093-982
093-926 Remove the unsupported toner cartridge of the specified color, and then install a
supported toner cartridge.
093-960
093-961 Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
093-962
093-930 Remove the used toner cartridge of the specified color, and then install a new
cartridge.
093-931
093-932 Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
093-933
093-970 Make sure that the toner cartridge of the specified color is fully installed.
093-971 Refer
093-972 • For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."

093-973

182 User Guide

Status-Code What you can do
116-722 Tap [Close] for the printer to recover. Make sure that the specified computer is
running, and then try scanning again. Contact your system administrator.
193-700 Non-genuine toner cartridges are installed. Check the settings to enable the
Non-Genuine mode.
Refer
• For details, see "Non-Genuine Mode (P.276)."

5 Know Your Printer 183

 6 Maintaining Your Printer

6.1 Managing the Printer................................................................................................ 185

6.2 About Supplies ............................................................................................................. 188
6.3 Replacing Consumables ........................................................................................... 190
6.4 Cleaning the Printer................................................................................................... 201
6.5 Moving the Printer...................................................................................................... 213
6.6 Removing the Wireless LAN Adapter and Optional Accessories.............. 215
6.7 Checking Page Counts .............................................................................................. 225

184 User Guide

6.1 Managing the Printer
You need to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality.

6.1.1 Managing the Printer With CentreWare

Internet Services
When the printer is installed in a TCP/IP environment, you can use CentreWare Internet Services to check the
printer status, the remaining volume of consumables, and the paper loaded in this printer. You can also use
CentreWare Internet Services to configure printer settings.
Refer
• For details how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."

6.1.2 Checking the Printer Status With E-mail

When the printer is connected in a network environment where it can send and receive e-mails, the printer can
send an e-mail report to specified e-mail addresses containing the following information:
• The status of the printer and consumables
• The error status which has occurred on the printer

Setting the E-mail Environment

1. Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2. Start CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer
• For details how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.99)."
3. Click the [Properties] tab.
4. Configure the following settings according to your e-mail environment.
Refer
• For details, see the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
5. Click [Apply], and then restart the printer.
Item Item to be Description
configured
[StatusMessenger] [Recipient's E-mail Set the e-mail address to which notices about changes in
Address] printer status or errors are sent.

[Notification Items] Set the contents of the notices to send in the e-mail.

[Port Status] [StatusMessenger] Select [Enabled].

6 Maintaining Your Printer 185

 Item Item to be Description
configured
[Protocol Settings] > [Machine's E-mail Select appropriate settings for sending and receiving e-mail.
[E-mail] Address],
[SMTP Server Address],
[SMTP Server Port
Number],
[E-Mail Send
Authentication],
[Login Name],
[Password],
[SMTP Server
Connection Status],
[POP3 Server Address],
[POP3 Server Port
Number],
[Login Name],
[Password],
[POP3 Server Check
Interval],
[APOP Settings],
[POP3 Server
Connection Status]

[Permitted E-mail When setting the permission for checking information and
Address] changing the settings for an e-mail address, enter the e-mail
address that is permitted to receive the e-mail. If no address is
entered here, the printer receives e-mails from all users.

[StatusMessenger When setting the password for access to the printer (both read
Password] only and read/write), enter the password in the [Password]
field.
[Print Job Password] When setting the password for printing e-mails, enter the
password in the [Password] field.

Sending the E-mail to the Printer

You can specify any title for the e-mail when checking the printer status or changing the printer settings.
Use the commands described in the next section to create the text of the e-mail.

 Rules of Commands
• Prefix all commands with "#", and specify the #Password command at the top of the e-mail.
• Command lines without "#" are ignored.
• Write one command on each line and separate each command and parameter with a space or a tab.
Note
• If the same command is written two or more times in one e-mail, the second and subsequent commands are ignored.

Command Parameter Description

#Password Password Use this command at the top of the e-mail when a password
for read only is set. You can omit this command when the
password is not set.

#NetworkInfo Set this when you want to check information on the network
settings list.

186 User Guide

 Command Parameter Description
#Status Set this when you want to check the printer status.

 Example of Commands
To check the printer status when the read only password is "ronly":
#Password ronly
#Status
#NetworkInfo

6 Maintaining Your Printer 187

 6.2 About Supplies
6.2.1 Supplies
Note
• Use of consumables/periodical replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair machine quality and
performance. Use only consumables/periodical replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.

Product Name Product Code Printable number of pages

STD-capacity Toner Cartridge (K) CT202606 3,000 pages
STD-capacity Toner Cartridge (C) CT202607 3,000 pages
STD-capacity Toner Cartridge (M) CT202608 3,000 pages
STD-capacity Toner Cartridge (Y) CT202609 3,000 pages
High-capacity Toner Cartridge (K) CT202610 6,000 pages
High-capacity Toner Cartridge (C) CT202611 6,000 pages
High-capacity Toner Cartridge (M) CT202612 6,000 pages
High-capacity Toner Cartridge (Y) CT202613 6,000 pages
Drum Cartridge kit (K) CT351100 50,000 pages
Drum Cartridge Kit (C) CT351101 50,000 pages
Drum Cartridge Kit (M) CT351102 50,000 pages
Drum Cartridge Kit (Y) CT351103 50,000 pages
Waste Toner Cartridge EL500293 30,000 pages

Recycling Supplies
• For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges
and drums (photoreceptors) to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery.
• Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges and drums (photoreceptors) no longer needed. Do not open
toner cartridges and drums (photoreceptors). Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.

6.2.2 Checking the Status of Supplies

If the printer is connected to the network, CentreWare Internet Services can provide instant feedback on
remaining toner levels. Enter the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. You can also
set the printer to send you an e-mail alert when the printer needs supplies. For details, see "Checking the Printer
Status With E-mail (P.185)."
On the operator panel, you can also check the following.
• Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display
information about one item at a time).
• Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.
Note
• If the printer is connected to a computer with Windows® Vista or later, you can also check the status of supplies from
Print & Scan Hub.

188 User Guide

6.2.3 Ordering Supplies
You can order toner cartridges, drum cartridges, and waste toner box by contacting the Fuji Xerox local
representative office or an authorized dealer.

6.2.4 Storing Print Media

To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do when
storing print media:
• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, make sure that they rest on a flat
surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

6.2.5 Storing Consumables

Store consumables in their original package until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
• Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F)
• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature
• Direct sunlight
• Dusty places
• A car for a long period of time
• An environment where corrosive gases are present
• A humid environment

6 Maintaining Your Printer 189

 6.3 Replacing Consumables
The following consumables are supplied as the replaceable items.
• Toner cartridge
• Drum cartridge
• Waste toner box

WARNING
• Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product, toner cartridge or toner bottle.
It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a vacuum cleaner and cause explosion.
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
• Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause
burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its
disposal.
• Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its
disposal.

CAUTION
• Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner,
spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.
• When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner
spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.
• If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in the eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is
gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician
immediately.

6.3.1 Replacing the Toner Cartridges

Fuji Xerox toner cartridges are available only through Fuji Xerox.
It is recommended to use Fuji Xerox toner cartridges for the printer. Fuji Xerox does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Fuji Xerox.

Overview
The printer has toner cartridges of four colors: black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan (C).
When a toner cartridge reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the touch panel.
The following messages use black toner cartridge as examples.

Message Remaining Page Printer Status and Action

Yield*2
"Order Toner Cartridge: Factory-installed: The toner has become low. Prepare a new one.
Black"*1 Approximately 240 pages
STD-capacity Toner
Cartridge:
Approximately 300 pages
High-capacity Toner
Cartridge:
Approximately 300 pages
"Replace Black Toner" - The toner cartridge has become empty. Replace the old toner
cartridge with a new one.

190 User Guide

*1
This message appears only when Fuji Xerox toner cartridge is used (The Non-Genuine mode is disabled).
*2
The remaining page yield differs depending on printing conditions, contents of the documents, and frequency of turning on/off the
printer. For more information, see "Supplies (P.188)."

Important
• When placing a used toner cartridge on the floor or on a table, place a few sheets of paper under the toner cartridge to
catch any toner that may spill.
• Do not reuse old toner cartridges once you remove them from the printer. Doing so can impair print quality.
• Do not shake or pound the used toner cartridges. The remaining toner may spill.
• We recommend you to use up the toner cartridges within one year after removing them from the packaging.
Note
• Black and white printing or copying is available even when the printer has run out of color toners. However, replace the
toner cartridges as soon as you can.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Note
• Make sure to remove all the paper from the bypass tray and close the bypass tray cover before removing the toner
cartridge.

1. Grasp the grips on both sides of the front cover, and then pull it down to open.

2. Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge that you want to replace, and then pull it out.

Important
• Do not shake the used toner cartridge. Shaking the cartridge may cause the toner to spill out.
3. Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 191

 4. Shake the new toner cartridge six times to distribute the toner evenly.

5. Align the toner cartridge to the notches on the associated cartridge slot, and then insert the toner
cartridge.

6. Push the toner cartridge all the way in until you feel a click.

7. Close the front cover.

6.3.2 Replacing the Drum Cartridges

Important
• Protect the drum cartridges against bright light. If the right side cover remains open for more than 3 minutes, print
quality may deteriorate.

Overview
The printer has drum cartridges of four colors: black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan (C).
When a drum cartridge reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the LCD panel.When a
drum cartridge reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the touch panel.
The following messages use black drum cartridge as examples.

192 User Guide

Message Remaining Page Yield Printer Status and Action
"Order Drum Cartridge: Approximately 300 pages The drum cartridge is near the end of its life. Prepare a new
Black" one.
"Replace Black Drum - The drum cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace
Cartridge" the old drum cartridge with a new one.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge

1. Open the right side cover.

2. Push down the latch to release the waste toner box from the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 193

 3. Gently pull the waste toner box upwards.

Important
• Take care not to drop the waste toner box while you are removing it.
• After removing the waste toner box, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Your hands may get dirty or stained
with toner.

4. Place the waste toner box on a level surface.

Always keep the side that was attached to the printer facing up.

Important
• Never let the side that was attached to the printer face down. This may cause the toner to spill out.

194 User Guide

5. Pull down the tab on the drum cartridge that you want to replace.

6. Pull the drum cartridge halfway out by pulling the tab, and then support the drum cartridge from
underneath with your other hand and pull it out completely.

7. Unpack a new drum cartridge of the desired color.

8. Remove the orange protective cover from the drum cartridge.

9. Insert the drum cartridge into the associated cartridge slot, and then push until it stops.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 195

 10. Pull up the tab on the drum cartridge.

11. Pull out the cleaning rod from inside the printer.

12. Insert the cleaning rod into the hole of the tab on the drum cartridge until it stops, and then pull it
out.
Note
• Insert the cleaning rod with the pad side up.
• It is not necessary to move the cleaning rod back and forth repeatedly.

196 User Guide

13. Return the cleaning rod to its original location.

14. Reinsert the waste toner box.

Make sure that the two indented parts on the bottom go into the brackets on the printer.

15. Push on the handle of the waste toner box until it clicks.

16. Close the right side cover.

6.3.3 Replacing the Waste Toner Box

Overview
When a waste toner box reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the touch panel.

Message Remaining Page Yield Printer Status and Action

"Order Waste Toner Box." Approximately 3,000 The waste toner box is near the end of its life. Prepare a new
pages one.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 197

 Message Remaining Page Yield Printer Status and Action
"Replace Waste Toner Box" - The waste toner box has reached the end of its life. Replace
the old waste toner box with a new one.

Replacing the Waste Toner Box

1. Open the right side cover.

2. Push down the latch to release the waste toner box from the printer.

3. Gently pull the waste toner box upwards.

198 User Guide

 Make sure that the side that was attached to the printer is facing up so that the waste toner does not spill
out.

Important
• Take care not to drop the waste toner box while you are removing it.
• After removing the waste toner box, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can soil or stain your hands.

4. Insert the used waste toner box into the plastic bag that came with the new waste toner box and seal
the bag.
5. Unpack a new waste toner box.
6. Insert the waste toner box.
Make sure that the two indented parts on the bottom go into the brackets on the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 199

 7. Push on the handle of the waste toner box until it clicks.

8. Close the right side cover.

200 User Guide

6.4 Cleaning the Printer
WARNING
• When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may
result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion.

CAUTION
• When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may cause electric
shock.
• When cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch circuit). Access to a live machine
interior may cause electric shock.

6.4.1 Cleaning Inside the Printer

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Note
• Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the operator panel.

1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.

2. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover, and open the rear cover.

3. Clean the CTD sensor with a clean and dry cotton swab.

4. Close the rear cover.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 201

 Cleaning the LED Print Head
To prevent deterioration of printing quality due to stains on the LED print head, clean the LED print head
regularly by using the cleaning rod or whenever you replace the drum cartridges.

1. Open the right side cover.

2. Push down the latch to release the waste toner box from the printer.

3. Gently pull the waste toner box upwards.

Important
• Take care not to drop the waste toner box while you are removing it.
• After removing the waste toner box, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty or stain your hands.

202 User Guide

4. Place the waste toner box on a level surface.
Always keep the side that was attached to the printer facing up.

Important
• Never let the side that was attached to the printer face down. This may cause the toner to spill out.

5. Pull out the cleaning rod from inside the printer.

6. Insert the cleaning rod into one of the four holes of the tabs on the drum cartridges until it stops, and
then pull it out.
Note
• Insert the cleaning rod with the pad side up.
• It is not necessary to move the cleaning rod back and forth repeatedly.

7. Repeat step 6 for the other three holes.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 203

 8. Return the cleaning rod to its original location.

9. Insert the waste toner box.

Make sure that the two indented parts on the bottom go into the brackets on the printer.

10. Push on the handle of the waste toner box until it clicks.

11. Close the right side cover.

Cleaning the Retard Rollers and Paper Feed Rollers

To prevent jams and multi-feed caused by misfeeding print media, clean regularly the retard rollers and paper
feed rollers of the bypass tray, tray1, and the optional 550-sheet feeder.

 Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of the Bypass Tray
1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.

204 User Guide

2. Gently pull and open the bypass tray.
Note
• If the bypass tray is already open, remove the paper on the bypass tray.

3. Grasp both sides of the bypass tray, and then pull it out of the printer.

4. While manually rotating the retard roller, gently wipe the roller with a soft, moistened cloth.

5. Gently wipe the paper feed rollers with a soft, moistened cloth.
Important
• Do not forcibly rotate the paper feed rollers. This may damage the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 205

 6. Insert the bypass tray into the printer.

 Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of Tray1

1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.
2. Gently pull and open the bypass tray.
Note
• If the bypass tray is already open, remove the paper on the bypass tray.

3. Grasp both sides of the bypass tray, and then pull it out of the printer.

206 User Guide

4. Pull tray1 out of the printer.

5. While manually rotating the retard roller, gently wipe the roller with a soft, moistened cloth.

6. While manually rotating the paper feed rollers inside the printer, gently wipe the roller with a soft,
moistened cloth.
Important
• Do not lay the printer on its side. This may cause toner to spill out.
• Do not touch any other parts inside the printer. This may damage the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 207

 7. Insert tray1 into the printer, and then push until it stops.

8. Insert the bypass tray into the printer.

 Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.
2. Pull the tray of the optional 550-sheet feeder halfway out of the printer.

208 User Guide

3. Hold the tray with both hands, slightly tip the front of the tray upwards, and then pull it out
completely.

4. While manually rotating the retard roller, gently wipe the roller with a soft, moistened cloth.

5. While manually rotating the paper feed rollers inside the optional 550-sheet feeder, gently wipe the
roller with a soft, moistened cloth.
Important
• Do not lay the printer on its side. This may cause toner to spill out.
• Do not touch any other parts inside the printer. This may damage the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 209

 6. Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and then push until it stops.

6.4.2 Cleaning the Scanner

Note
• It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day, as needed.

1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2. Open the document cover.

210 User Guide

3. Wipe the surface of the document glass, DADF glass, white strip, and white document cover, and then
wipe with a dry cloth or paper towel until they are completely dry.
Note
• Handle the white strip with care.

4
1
3 2

1 White Strip
2 White Document Cover
3 Document Glass
4 DADF Glass

4. Pull the tab to open the DADF chute cover and hold it open.

5. Wipe the surface of the duplex sensor glass and white strip, and then wipe with a dry cloth or paper
towel until they are completely dry.

1 Duplex Sensor Glass

2 White Strip

6 Maintaining Your Printer 211

 6. Gently close the DADF chute cover.
7. Close the document cover.

6.4.3 Cleaning the DADF Feed Rollers and DADF

Retard Pad
Note
• It is recommended to clean the DADF feed rollers and DADF retard pad at regular intervals.

1. Open the DADF cover.

2. Wipe the DADF feed rollers and DADF retard pad with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel.
Note
• If the DADF feed rollers and DADF retard pad get stained with ink, documents that go through the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) can also become stained. In this case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel
with a neutral detergent or water, and then wipe the stained parts.

212 User Guide

6.5 Moving the Printer
Important
• If the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) and the cabinet have been installed, uninstall them before moving the printer. If
the optional 550-sheet feeder and the cabinet are not fixed securely to the printer, they may fall to the ground and
cause injuries. For details about how to uninstall the optional 550-sheet feeder and the cabinet, see "Removing the
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder and the Cabinet (P.218)."

1. Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord, interface cable, and any other cables.
2. Remove any paper from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), and then retract the
document stopper.

3. Remove any paper in the output tray, and then return the output tray extension.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 213

 4. Lift the printer and move it gently.
Important
• Two people are required to lift the printer.

Note
• If you move the printer over a long distance, remove the toner cartridges from the printer to prevent toner from spilling,
and then pack the printer into a box. For details about how to remove the toner cartridges, see "Replacing the Toner
Cartridges (P.190)."

214 User Guide

6.6 Removing the Wireless LAN Adapter
and Optional Accessories
Note
• If you change the printer location, or if you ship the printer and the optional accessories to a new location, you must
remove the wireless LAN adapter, the optional 550-sheet feeder, and the cabinet from the printer. For shipping, pack
them securely and safely to avoid damage.

6.6.1 Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

1. Make sure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer.
2. Slide the lock switch of the optional 550-sheet feeder to the unlock position.

3. Gently lift the printer off the optional 550-sheet feeder, and then place it on a level surface.
Important
• Two people are required to lift the printer.

4. Connect all the cables into the rear of the printer, and then turn on the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 215

 6.6.2 Removing the Cabinet
1. Turn off the printer.

2. Press on the latch of the cable clamp to open the clamp, and then remove the power cord from the
clamp.

3. Unhook the power cord from the cable hook.

216 User Guide

4. Disconnect the power cord and all other cables from the rear of the printer.

5. Loosen the two screws holding the cable hook, and then remove the hook from the cabinet.

6. Slide the lock switch of the cabinet to the unlock position.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 217

 7. Gently lift the printer off the cabinet, and then place it on a level surface.
Important
• Two people are required to lift the printer.

6.6.3 Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder and

the Cabinet
1. Turn off the printer.

218 User Guide

2. Press on the latch of the cable clamp to open the clamp, and then remove the power cord from the
clamp.

3. Unhook the power cord from the cable hook.

4. Disconnect the power cord and all other cables from the rear of the printer.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 219

 5. Loosen the two screws holding the cable hook, and then remove the hook from the cabinet.

6. Slide the lock switch of the optional 550-Sheet Feeder to the unlock position.

220 User Guide

7. Gently lift the printer off the optional 550-Sheet Feeder, and then place it on a level surface.
Important
• Two people are required to lift the printer.

8. Slide the lock switch of the cabinet to the unlock position.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 221

 9. Gently lift the optional 550-Sheet Feeder off the cabinet, and then place it on a level surface.

6.6.4 Removing the Wireless LAN Adapter

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Slide the latch to the right, and then flip the latch towards you.

222 User Guide

3. Hold the cover with one hand, and then pull the latch towards you with the other and remove the left
cover.

4. Push the release lever towards the front of the printer, and then pull out the wireless LAN adapter.

5. Attach the cover and slide the cover towards the front of the printer.

6. Flip the latch towards the front of the printer, and then slide the latch to the left and lock the cover.

6 Maintaining Your Printer 223

 7. Attach the wireless adapter socket cover.

224 User Guide

6.7 Checking Page Counts
The total number of printed pages can be checked with the billing meter function displayed on the operator
panel. The billing meter has four meters and classified according to color mode.
Note
• You can also check the number of printed pages on CentreWare Internet Services. For details about the settings, see the
help of CentreWare Internet Services.

6.7.1 Counting up the Number of Pages

The billing meter counts up the number of pages printed. Single-side print is counted as one job, and 2-sided
print is counted as two.
Note
• When printing color data which has been converted by using ICC profile on an application, with the Color (Auto) setting,
the data is printed by color.

6.7.2 Checking Billing Meters

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device].

3. Tap [Billing Meters].

Refer
• For details about the function of each meter, see "[Billing Meters] (P.73)."

6 Maintaining Your Printer 225

 7 Troubleshooting

7.1 Clearing Jams............................................................................................................... 227

7.2 Possible Problems and Solutions........................................................................... 238
7.3 Contacting Service ..................................................................................................... 266
7.4 Getting Help ................................................................................................................. 267

226 User Guide

7.1 Clearing Jams
Important
• Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.
Note
• To avoid paper jams, carefully select appropriate print media, and properly load documents and print media. For details
about how to select and load print media, see "Print Media Guidelines (P.102)," and "Loading Print Media (P.107)."

7.1.1 Identifying the Location of Paper Jams

CAUTION
• Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the printer, particularly a paper wrapped around the
fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Turn off the printer immediately and
contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.

1 2

5 4 3

1 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

2 Fusing Unit
3 Tray1
4 Bypass Tray
5 Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

7 Troubleshooting 227
 7.1.2 Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Note
• To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin, or mixed documents.
• To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

Clearing Documents From the Document Feed Area and Document

Exit Area
1. Remove the remaining documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
2. Open the DADF cover.

3. Remove any jammed documents from inside the DADF cover by gently pulling the document straight
up.

4. Lift the document feeder tray.

228 User Guide

 5. Remove any jammed documents from the document output tray.

6. Close the DADF cover, and then load the documents back into the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF).

Clearing Documents From Inside the DADF Chute Cover

If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed
documents, open the DADF chute cover and remove the jammed documents from there.

1. Open the document cover.

7 Troubleshooting 229
 2. Pull the tab to open the DADF chute cover and hold it open.

3. Remove the document from inside the DADF chute cover by carefully pulling it to the left.

4. Gently close the DADF chute cover.

5. Close the document cover, and then load the documents back into the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF).

7.1.3 Clearing Paper Jams From the Bypass Tray

and Tray1
Note
• To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

230 User Guide

1. Gently pull and open the bypass tray.
Note
• If the bypass tray is already open, remove the paper on the bypass tray.

2. Grasp both sides of the bypass tray, and then pull it out of the printer.

3. Pull tray1 out of the printer.

WARNING
• If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not pull out
a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.

7 Troubleshooting 231
 4. Remove the jammed paper.

5. Insert tray1 into the printer, and then push until it stops.

6. Insert the bypass tray into the printer.

7.1.4 Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Rear

Cover
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around the
fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product immediately and
contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Note
• To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

232 User Guide

Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit
1. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover, and then open the rear cover.

2. Remove the jammed paper from below the fusing unit.

3. Pull the tab that is located above the fusing unit and hold the part open.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

7 Troubleshooting 233
 5. Gently release the tab and close the part.

6. Close the rear cover.

Clearing Paper Jams From Between the Rollers

1. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover and open the rear cover.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

3. Close the rear cover.

234 User Guide

Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplex Unit
1. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover and open the rear cover.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

3. Close the rear cover.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear Chute

When a status code for a paper jam inside the rear cover appear but you cannot find the jammed paper, check
inside the rear chute.

1. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover, and then open the rear cover.

7 Troubleshooting 235
 2. Pull the tab to open the rear chute.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

4. Close the rear cover.

7.1.5 Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional

550-Sheet Feeder
Note
• To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1. Pull the tray of the optional 550-sheet feeder halfway out of the printer.
WARNING
• If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not pull out
a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.

236 User Guide

2. Hold the tray with both hands, slightly tip the front of the tray upwards, and then pull it out
completely.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

4. Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and then push until it stops.

7 Troubleshooting 237
 7.2 Possible Problems and Solutions
7.2.1 Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easily resolved. If a problem occurs with the printer, check each of the following.
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The printer is turned on.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• All optional accessories are properly installed.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then
turn on the printer. This often fixes the problem.
Note
• If error messages are displayed on the operator panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to
resolve the printer problems. For details about the error messages, see "Understanding Printer Messages (P.175)."

7.2.2 Display Problems

Problem Action
Menu settings changed from the Settings in the software program, the print driver, or the printer utilities
operator panel have no effect. have precedence over the settings made on the operator panel.

7.2.3 Printing Problems

Problem Action
Cannot print or the printout has Make sure that the top menu appears on the operator panel before you
incorrect characters. send a job to print. Press the <Home> button to return to the top
menu.
Make sure that the print media is loaded in the printer. Press the
<Home> button to return to the top menu.
Verify that the correct Page Description Language (PDL) is used.
Verify that the correct print driver is used.
Make sure that the correct USB or Ethernet cable is securely connected to
the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you use a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the printer's interface from [Device].
Determine the current host interface. Tap [Information Pages] > [Panel
Settings] to verify that the current interface settings are correct.
Refer
• For details, see "[Panel Settings] (P.70)."

238 User Guide

Problem Action
Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds Make sure that the print media meets the specifications for the printer.
occur.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Make sure that the print media is not curled.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the
print media.
Flex, fan, and straighten the print media before loading it.
Turn the print media over or around and print again.
Make sure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media (P.107)."
Do not overload tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the bypass tray.
Do not force print media into the bypass tray when you load it; otherwise, it
may skew or buckle.
Make sure that the recommended print side is facing up.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media (P.107)."
Make sure that the width and length guides are adjusted correctly.
Make sure that tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the bypass tray is
securely inserted.
Load envelopes in the bypass tray instead of tray1.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Envelopes (P.113)."
When you select [Covers Thick] as the paper type, perform the following.
1 Load print media in the bypass tray.
2 Select [Rough Surface] in [Paper Type].
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media in the Bypass Tray (P.111)."
Wipe the retard roller and paper feed rollers of tray1, the optional
550-sheet feeder, or the bypass tray with a soft lint-free cloth.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Rollers and Paper Feed Rollers
(P.204)."
The envelope is creased after printed. Make sure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in "Loading Envelopes
(P.113)."
Page breaks in unexpected places. Increase the value for time-out on the operator panel, or CentreWare
Internet Services.
Print media does not stack neatly in the Turn the print media stack over in tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or
output tray. the bypass tray.

7 Troubleshooting 239
 Problem Action
Cannot print from tray1 or the optional Load the print media into the bypass tray.
550-sheet feeder because the print
media in tray1 or the optional 550-sheet
feeder is curled.

7.2.4 Print Quality Problems

Note
• Some of the following procedures can be performed using the operator panel or CentreWare Internet Services. For
details about the settings, see "Understanding the Printer Menus (P.70)," and the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Light Printout

Problem Action
The printed result is too light. 1 Check the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge and replace the toner
cartridges as necessary.
Refer
• For details about the remaining amount of toner, see "[Supplies]
(P.73)."
Note
• You can also check the toner level with CentreWare Internet Services
or Print & Scan Hub. For details about CentreWare Internet Services,
see the help of CentreWare Internet Services. For details about Print
& Scan Hub, see "Print & Scan Hub (Windows®) (P.155)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 If you use a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridges, enable the non-genuine toner
option.
Refer
• For details, see "Non-Genuine Mode (P.276)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Disable the toner saving mode in the print driver.
a On the [Image Options] tab, make sure that [Off] is selected in the [Draft
Mode] drop-down menu.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 The print media surface may be uneven. Change the paper type in the print
driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.
a On the [Paper/Output] tab, change the paper type setting.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.

240 User Guide

Problem Action
5 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 6.
6 Clean the developer and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Clean Developer/Transfer Unit] (P.90)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 7.
7 Ensure a proper balance between toner and developing powder, and print a
Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Toner Refresh] (P.90)" and "[Demo Page] (P.71)."
Note
• This feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge
and the drum cartridge.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 8.
8 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Smearing Toner/Loose Toner

Problem Action
Toner smears or toner comes off. 1 The print media surface may be uneven. Change the paper type in the print
driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.
a On the [Paper/Output] tab, change the paper type setting.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.

7 Troubleshooting 241
 Problem Action
4 Clean the developer and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Clean Developer/Transfer Unit] (P.90)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Random Spots/Blurred Images

Problem Action
The printout has random spots or 1 Make sure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly.
is blurred.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Make sure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Blank Printout

242 User Guide

Problem Action
The printout is entirely blank. 1 Check the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge and replace the toner
cartridges as necessary.
Refer
• For details about the remaining amount of toner, see "[Supplies]
(P.73)."
Note
• You can also check the toner level with CentreWare Internet Services
or Print & Scan Hub. For details about CentreWare Internet Services,
see the help of CentreWare Internet Services. For details about Print
& Scan Hub, see "Print & Scan Hub (Windows®) (P.155)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 If you use a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridges, enable the non-genuine toner
option.
Refer
• For details, see "Non-Genuine Mode (P.276)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Disable the toner saving mode in the print driver.
a On the [Image Options] tab, check that [Off] is selected in the [Draft
Mode] drop-down menu.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 The print media surface may be uneven. Change the paper type in the print
driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.
a On the [Paper/Output] tab, change the paper type setting.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.
5 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 6.
6 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Streaks

7 Troubleshooting 243
 Problem Action
Streaks appear on the printout. 1 Check the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge and replace the toner
cartridges as necessary.
Refer
• For details about the remaining amount of toner, see "[Supplies]
(P.73)."
Note
• You can also check the toner level with CentreWare Internet Services
or Print & Scan Hub. For details about CentreWare Internet Services,
see the help of CentreWare Internet Services. For details about Print
& Scan Hub, see "Print & Scan Hub (Windows®) (P.155)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 If you use a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridges, enable the non-genuine toner
option.
Refer
• For details, see "Non-Genuine Mode (P.276)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Black Printout (Partial or Entire Page)

Problem Action
Part or the entire printout is black. 1 Make sure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Check that [Output Color] is set to [Color] in the print driver.
a On the [Color Options] tab, Make sure that [Output Color] is set to [Color].
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

244 User Guide

Equally Spaced Colored Dots

Problem Action
The printout has equally spaced 1 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
colored dots
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Vertical Blanks

Problem Action
The printout has vertical blanks. 1 Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod and print a Demo Page for
verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the LED Print Head (P.202)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Make sure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

7 Troubleshooting 245
 Mottle

Problem Action
The printout is mottled. 1 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Raise the transfer unit voltage.
Refer
• For details, see "[Adjust 2nd BTR] (P.89)."
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Ghosting

246 User Guide

Problem Action
The printout has ghosting. 1 Identify the type of ghosting.

Positive ghost Negative ghost

If the type of ghosting is positive ghost, proceed to step 2a.

If the type of ghosting is negative ghost, proceed to step 2b.
If the type of ghosting is not identified, contact Fuji Xerox local representative
office or an authorized dealer.
2a Adjust the transfer bias.
a Press the <Home> button and tap [Device] > [Maintenance] >
[Adjust Transfer Belt Unit].
b Tap [K Offset] or [YMC Offset], and then decrease the value.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
2b Adjust the transfer bias.
a Press the <Home> button and tap [Device] > [Maintenance] >
[Adjust Transfer Belt Unit].
b Tap [K Offset] or [YMC Offset], and then increase the value.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Light-Induced Fatigue

7 Troubleshooting 247
 Problem Action
The printout has light-induced 1 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
fatigue pattern.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Fog

248 User Guide

Problem Action
The printed result is foggy. 1 If the whole page of the printout is light, contact Fuji Xerox local
representative office or an authorized dealer. If not, proceed to step 2.
2 Clean the developer and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Clean Developer/Transfer Unit] (P.90)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Ensure a proper balance between toner and developing powder, and print a
Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Toner Refresh] (P.90)" and "[Demo Page] (P.71)."
Note
• This feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge
and the drum cartridge.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4a or 4b.
4a If you use a non-Fuji Xerox toner cartridge, enable the non-genuine toner
option.
Refer
• For details, see "Non-Genuine Mode (P.276)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.
4b If you use a Fuji Xerox toner, replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo
Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.
5 Replace the toner cartridge with a Fuji Xerox toner and print a Demo Page for
verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

7 Troubleshooting 249
 Problem Action
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) occurs. 1 If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of the
location and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "[Adjust Altitude] (P.91)" and "[Demo Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Jagged Characters

Problem Action
The printout has jagged The following procedure uses the Printer Control Language (PCL) driver as an
characters. example.
1 Set [Screen] to [Fineness] in the print driver.
a On the [Advanced] tab, set [Screen] under [Image Options] to [Fineness].
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Set [Image Quality] to [High Quality] in the print driver.
a On the [Color Options] tab, make sure that [Output Color] is set to [Color].
b Select [High Quality] from [Image Quality].
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Enable [Print Page Mode] in the print driver.
a On the [Advanced] tab, set [Print Page Mode] under [Image Options] to
[On].
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 If a downloaded font is used, make sure that the font is compatible for the
printer, operating system, and the program being used.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

250 User Guide

Horizontal Bands

Problem Action
The printout has horizontal 1 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
bands.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Diagonal Lines

Problem Action
The printout has diagonal lines. 1 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Wrinkled/Stained Printout

7 Troubleshooting 251
 Problem Action
The printout is wrinkled. 1 Make sure that the correct print media is being used.
The printout is stained.
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
If the problem persists on envelopes, proceed to step 2.
If the problem persists on print media other than envelopes, proceed to step
4.
2 Make sure that the envelope edges are wrinkled within 30 mm.
If the problem persists on envelopes, proceed to step 3.
3 Load the envelopes properly.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Envelopes (P.113)."
If the problem persists on envelopes, proceed to step 4.
4 Adjust the paper guides properly.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.
5 Replace the print media with the freshly unpackaged, undamaged one.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Damage on the Leading Edge of Printout

Problem Action
The printout is damaged on its 1 Adjust the paper guides properly.
leading edge. If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 When using the bypass tray, reverse the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
When using any of the trays other than the bypass tray, change the print
media.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.
3 Change the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
4 Use any of the trays in place of the bypass tray.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

252 User Guide

7.2.5 Jam/Alignment Problems
Note
• Some of the following procedures can be performed using the operator panel. For details about the settings, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus (P.70)."

Incorrect Margins on the Top and Side

Problem Action
The top and side margins are 1 Adjust the paper guides properly.
incorrect. If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Use any of the trays in place of the bypass tray.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Make sure that the margins are set correctly on the program being used.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Disorganized Color Registration

Problem Action
Color registration is out of 1 Change the paper type in the print driver.
alignment. If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Execute auto color registration adjustment.
Refer
• For details, see "[Adjust Color Registration] (P.90)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

7 Troubleshooting 253
 Skewed Images

Problem Action
The printout is skewed. 1 Adjust the paper guides properly.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Use any of the trays in place of the bypass tray.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the print media with the freshly unpackaged, undamaged one.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam

Problem Action
Print media misfeeds occur in 1 Make sure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted.
tray1 or the optional 550-sheet If the type of the print media being used is thick, proceed to 2a.
feeder. If the type of the print media being used is thin, proceed to 2b.
If the type of the print media being used is coated, proceed to 2c.
If using paper other than the above, proceed to steps 2d and 2e.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
2d Make sure that the print media is not curled.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
2e Make sure that the print media is not damp.
If the print media is not damp, proceed to step 3a.
If the print media is damp, proceed to step 3c.
3a Flex, fan, and straighten the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
3b Wipe the retard roller and paper feed rollers of tray1 or the optional
550-sheet feeder with a cloth moistened with water.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
Tray1 (P.206)."
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (P.208)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4b.

254 User Guide

Problem Action
3c Turn over the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4a.
4a Use print media that is not damp.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
4b Replace the drum cartridges.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Bypass Tray Misfeed Jam

Problem Action
Print media misfeeds occur in the 1 Make sure that the bypass tray is properly inserted.
bypass tray. If the type of the print media being used is thick, proceed to 2a.
If the type of the print media being used is thin, proceed to 2b.
If the type of the print media being used is coated, proceed to 2c.
If the type of the print media being used is envelope, proceed to 2d.
If using paper other than the above, proceed to step 2e.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3d.
2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
2d Make sure that the envelope is properly loaded in the bypass tray as
instructed.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Envelopes (P.113)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3c.
2e Make sure that the print media is not damp.
If the print media is not damp, proceed to step 3a.
If the print media is damp, proceed to step 3c.
3a Flex, fan, and straighten the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3b.
3b Wipe the retard roller and paper feed rollers of the bypass tray with a cloth
moistened with water.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
the Bypass Tray (P.204)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4a.
3c If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3a.
3d Turn over the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4a.
4a Use print media that is not damp.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4b.

7 Troubleshooting 255
 Problem Action
4b Replace the drum cartridges.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)

Problem Action
Regi jam (Exit Sensor On JAM) 1 Make sure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
occurs. If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Replace the drum cartridges.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam

Problem Action
Print media multiple-feeds occur 1 Make sure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted.
in tray1 or the optional If using coated paper, proceed to step 2a.
550-sheet feeder. If using other type of print media, proceed to step 2b.
2a Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
2b Use print media that is not damp.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Flex, fan, and straighten the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 Wipe the retard roller and paper feed rollers of tray1 or the optional
550-sheet feeder where the multi-feed occurred with a cloth moistened with
water.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
Tray1 (P.206)."
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (P.208)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

Bypass Tray Multi-feed Jam

Problem Action
Print media multiple feeds occur 1 Check the type of print media.
in the bypass tray. If using coated paper, proceed to step 2a.
If using other type of print media, proceed to step 2b.
2a Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.

256 User Guide

Problem Action
2b Use print media that is not damp.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Flex, fan, and straighten the print media.
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 Wipe the retard roller and paper feed rollers of the bypass tray with a cloth
moistened with water.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Retard Roller and Paper Feed Rollers of
the Bypass Tray (P.204)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.
5 Decrease the number of print media to be loaded to the bypass tray.
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

7.2.6 Noise
Problem Action
The printout has noise. 1 To specify the cause of the noise, perform the color registration adjustment.
Refer
• For details, see "[Adjust Color Registration] (P.90)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 2.
2 Replace the waste toner box.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Box (P.197)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 3.
3 Replace the drum cartridges and print a Demo Page for verification.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges (P.192)" and "[Demo
Page] (P.71)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 4.
4 Replace the toner cartridge (K).
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 5.
5 Replace the toner cartridge (Y).
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 6.
6 Replace the toner cartridge (M).
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
If the problem persists, proceed to step 7.

7 Troubleshooting 257
 Problem Action
7 Replace the toner cartridge (C).
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
If the problem persists, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an
authorized dealer.

7.2.7 Copy Problems

Problem Action
A document loaded in the Duplex Make sure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
cannot be copied.
Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the Clean the DADF glass.
output when scanned using the Duplex
Refer
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
• For details, see "Cleaning the Scanner (P.210)."
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the LED Print Head (P.202)."
The copy is misaligned or skewed. Before loading the document(s) in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF), straighten the edges of the stack of the document(s).
Load the document correctly, and align the document guides to the
document.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) (P.116)."

7.2.8 Scanning Problems

Problem Action
The scanner does not work. Make sure that you place the document to be scanned facing down on the
document glass, or facing up in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF).
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you
want to scan. Lower the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again.
Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is not defective. Switch the cable
with a known good cable.
If using the network TWAIN or Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver,
check that the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the IP address of
the printer is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Verifying the IP Settings (P.43)."

258 User Guide

Problem Action
Make sure that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the program you
want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct
port.
Make sure that the scanner sharing feature of a Mac OS X is disabled before
you scan documents via an ICA compatible program such as Image
Capture. The printer does not support the scanner sharing feature of Mac
OS X. Select a printer which is directly connected to the computer via USB or
wired/wireless LAN and scan documents.
The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to Email
or Scan to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large
amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned data.
Scanning documents at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at
a low resolution.
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds Make sure that the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the
occur in the Duplex Automatic printer.
Document Feeder (DADF).
Refer
• For details, see "Supported Print Media (P.102)."
Make sure that the document is properly loaded in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
Make sure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
Make sure that the number of document sheets does not exceed the
maximum capacity of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Make sure that the document is not curled.
Flex, fan, and straighten the document well before loading it in the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the Clean the DADF glass.
output when scanned using the Duplex
Refer
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
• For details, see "Cleaning the Scanner (P.210)."
A smear appears at the same location Clean the document glass.
on the output when scanned using the
Refer
document glass.
• For details, see "Cleaning the Scanner (P.210)."
Images are skewed. Make sure that the document is loaded straight in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) or on the document glass.
Before loading the document(s) in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF), straighten the edges of the stack of the document(s).
Diagonal lines appear jagged when For documents of thick paper, use the document glass.
scanned using the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
Message appears on your computer Make sure that [Service Lock] for [PC Scan] is set to [Enable].
screen:
Refer
• "Unable to scan. The Scan function is
• For details, see "[Service Lock] (P.87)."
disabled. Please contact your system
administrator." Make sure that the printer is turned on.
• "Unable to retrieve picture from Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
device. Verify the device is properly
connected and try again."

7 Troubleshooting 259
 Problem Action
The printer does not properly send Make sure that the correct addresses have been registered in the address
scanned data to a specified e-mail or book.
server address.
Refer
• For details, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(P.160)."
Scanning using TWAIN or Windows® Install Desktop Experience on the computer.
Image Acquisition (WIA) cannot be
Refer
performed on a Windows Server® 2008
• For details about how to install Desktop Experience, see
or Windows Server® 2008 R2 computer.
Microsoft® Technet.
Scanning using TWAIN or Windows® Install Desktop Experience on the computer.
Image Acquisition (WIA) cannot be
Refer
performed on a Windows Server® 2012
• For details about how to install Desktop Experience, see
or Windows Server® 2012 R2 computer.
Microsoft® Technet.

7.2.9 Fax Problems

Problem Action
The printer is not working, there is no Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
display and the buttons are not working.
Make sure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
No dial tone sounds. Make sure that the printer is properly connected to a telephone line.
Refer
• For details, see "Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
(P.19)."
Make sure that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in
another phone.
The numbers stored in the memory do Print an Address Book list and make sure that the numbers are stored in the
not dial correctly. memory correctly.
The document does not feed into the Make sure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in
printer. correctly. Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.
Make sure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically. Make sure that the fax receive mode other than [TEL Mode] is selected.
Refer
• For details, see "[Receive Mode] (P.76)."
Make sure that there is paper in the paper tray.
Check if "Fax Memory Full" is displayed on the touch panel. If "Fax Memory
Full" is displayed on the touch panel, delete any documents you no longer
need from the memory.
If the time interval specified for the settings under [Auto Answer Setup] is
too long, change the time interval shorter such as 30 seconds.
Refer
• For details, see "[Auto Answer Setup] (P.77)."

260 User Guide

Problem Action
The printer does not send faxes. "Sending" should show up on the touch panel.
Check the remote fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive
your fax.
Make sure that the country code is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "[Country/Region] (P.75)."
Make sure that the dialing type is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.78)."
Make sure that the printer is properly connected to a telephone line.
Refer
• For details, see "Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
(P.19)."
Make sure that the document is loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) or on the document glass.
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is Check the printer by making a copy.
received in poor quality. The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge.
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges (P.190)."
A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Reduce the modem speed.
Refer
• For details, see "[Modem Speed] (P.79)."
The remote fax machine may be faulty.
Some of the words on an incoming fax The remote fax machine had a temporary document jam.
are stretched.
There are lines on the documents you Check the surface of the document glass and DADF glass for marks and
send. clean it.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning the Scanner (P.210)."
The printer dials a number, but the The remote fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer
connection with the remote fax machine incoming calls. Speak with the remote fax machine operator and ask
fails. her/him to sort out the problem.
Documents are not stored in the There may not be enough memory to store the document. If "Fax Memory
memory. Full" is displayed on the touch panel, delete any documents you no longer
need from the memory. And then, restore the document, or wait for the job
in progress such as fax transmission or reception to complete.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of You may have chosen the wrong paper settings.
each page or on other pages, with a
Refer
small strip of text at the top.
• For details, see "[Trays] (P.72)."

7 Troubleshooting 261
 Problem Action
The printer does not receive faxes. Make sure that the country code is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "[Country/Region] (P.75)."
Make sure that the dialing type is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.78)."
Make sure that the printer is properly connected to a telephone line.
Refer
• For details, see "Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
(P.19)."
If the telephone cable is connected to the printer via any device such as an
answering machine and a computer, remove the device and directly
connect the telephone cable to the printer.
Make sure that [Junk Fax Filter] is set to [Off].
Refer
• For details, see "[Junk Fax Filter] (P.77)."
An error often occurs during a fax Reduce the modem speed.
transmission or reception.
Refer
• For details, see "[Modem Speed] (P.79)."
The printer receive faxes, but it does not Check the toner level.
print.
Refer
• For details, see "[Supplies] (P.73)."
Make sure that there is paper in the paper tray.
Make sure that [Forward Settings] is set to [Off], [Print and Forward], [Print
and Email], or [Print & Fwd to Server].
Refer
• For details, see "[Forward Settings] (P.77)."
Make sure that the secure receiving mode is turned off. If this mode is
turned on, enter the correct password or turn off this mode to print faxes in
memory.
Refer
• For details, see "[Secure Fax Receive] (P.88)."

7.2.10 Digital Certificate Problems

Problem Action
The following buttons are disabled: SSL/TLS communication may be disabled. Create a self-signed certificate
• [Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and enable SSL/TLS communication.
• [Upload Signed Certificate]

262 User Guide

Problem Action
The certificate cannot be imported. The time setting may be incorrect. Check the validity period of the
certificate as well as the time setting of the printer.
The certificate file may be incorrect. Make sure that the password is correct.
Make sure that the file type is PKCS#7/#12 or x509CACert.
Make sure that the attribute information such as key Usage or Extended key
usage of the certificate to be imported is set correctly.
The browser may be incorrect. Use Internet Explorer®.
016-404 is displayed when trying to use The certificate data stored in internal memory may be either deleted,
security settings that require certificates. corrupt, or may not be readable. Import the certificate and enable the
security settings again.
A certificate cannot be set with The validity period of the certificate may be expired. Make sure that the
[Certificate Details]. time setting of the printer is correct, and whether the validity period of the
certificate has expired.
The certificate path is invalid. The certificate chain (path validation) of the
imported certificate may not be correctly validated. Make sure that all of
the high-level certificates (Trusted/Intermediate) have been imported and
are not deleted, and whether the validity period has expired.
Although a certificate was imported, it is The type of the certificate is incorrect. To import a certificate for use with
not displayed when selecting with [Local the device (own device), import the secret key and a certificate of the
Device]. PKCS#12 (p12/pfx) format as a pair.
Server validation is not operating Although importing a root certificate (Trusted) to use for server
correctly. authentication, an Intermediate certificate may be required when
validating the path.
When executing a certificate file with the certification authority, create the
certificate with a format including all paths and then import that certificate.

7.2.11 Wireless Problems

Problem Action
Cannot set up wireless connection. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
Make sure that [Wi-Fi] is enabled.
Refer
• For details, see "[Wi-Fi] (P.80)."
The firewall on your computer may be blocking communication with your
printer. Disable the firewall on your computer.
Make sure that your local wireless network is supported on 802.11b/g/n at
2.4 GH.
Cannot set up wireless connection with Make sure that the security setting of the access point or wireless router is
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). WPA or WPA2. (WEP is not supported on WPS.)
Cannot set up wireless connection with Press the WPS button on the access point or wireless router within 2 minutes
the WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected after starting the WPS operation on the printer. For details about the access
Setup-Push Button Configuration). point or wireless router, see the manual supplied with the access point or
wireless router.
Cannot set up wireless connection with Check if the PIN you have entered on the computer is correct.
WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup-Personal Identification Number).

7 Troubleshooting 263
 7.2.12 Wi-Fi Direct Problems
Problem Action
The mobile device cannot discover the The printer may be connected to another mobile device via Wi-Fi Direct.
printer. Disconnect the printer and the mobile device.
Refer
• For details, see "Disconnecting Mobile Devices From a Wi-Fi Direct
Network (P.36)."
The mobile device cannot be The mobile device may be automatically reconnecting to the printer. Reset
disconnected from the printer even the passphrase for Wi-Fi Direct and disconnect the mobile device.
when the procedure in "Disconnecting
Refer
Mobile Devices From a Wi-Fi Direct
• For details, see "Resetting the Passphrase (P.36)."
Network (P.36)" has been performed.
The network mode of the printer cannot Make sure that [Wi-Fi Direct] is disabled.
be set to an Ad-hoc mode.
[Wi-Fi Direct] cannot be enabled. Make sure that the network mode is set to an infrastructure mode.
Make sure that [IP Mode] is set to a mode other than [IPv6].

7.2.13 Problems With Installed Optional 550-sheet

feeder
If an optional 550-sheet feeder does not operate correctly following installation or stops working, perform the
following:
• Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. If this does not fix the problem, unplug
the printer, and then check the connection between the optional 550-sheet feeder and the printer.
• Print the System Settings report to see if the optional 550-sheet feeder is listed in the Printer Options list. If
the optional 550-sheet feeder is not listed, re-install it. See "[Information Pages] (P.70)."
• Make sure that the optional 550-sheet feeder is selected in the print driver you are using.
The following table lists corrective actions for related problems. If the suggested corrective action does not
correct the problem, contact Fuji Xerox local representative office or an authorized dealer.

Problem Action
The optional 550-sheet feeder does not Make sure that the optional 550-sheet feeder is correctly installed on the
work correctly. printer. Re-install the feeder.
Refer
• For details, see "Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (P.215),"
and see the installation instruction that comes with the optional
550-sheet feeder.
Make sure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional
550-Sheet Feeder (P.107)."

264 User Guide

7.2.14 Scanner Driver/Printer Software Problems
Problem Action
Unable to retrieve the address book Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
data from the printer on the Address Make sure that the printer is turned on.
Book Editor.
Make sure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer. The
Address Book Editor retrieves the address book data via the scanner driver
when the printer is connected using a USB cable.
The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
printer.
If using the network connection, make sure that the IP address of the
printer is set correctly.
Refer
• For details, see "Verifying the IP Settings (P.43)."
Make sure that the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, restart it
by turning off the printer and then on again.
If a scan program is running, close the program, restart the program, and
then try scanning again.
The scanner driver has not been Install the scanner driver. If the scanner driver is installed, uninstall it and
registered on your computer. then re-install it.

7.2.15 Other Problems

Problem Action
Condensation has occurred inside the This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter.
printer. This also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative
humidity reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer
to an appropriate environment.

7 Troubleshooting 265
 7.3 Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message
that appears.
You need to know the model type and serial number (SER#) of your printer. See the plate on the rear of the
printer and write down the serial number.

266 User Guide

7.4 Getting Help
7.4.1 Operator Panel Messages
The operator panel provides you with information and troubleshooting help. When an error or warning condition
occurs, the operator panel displays a message informing you of the problem. See "Understanding Printer
Messages (P.175)."

7.4.2 Obtaining the Product Information

Obtaining the Latest Software
The latest software can be obtained by downloading it from our web site.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.
Note
• The communication fee shall be borne by users.

1. Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].

For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] >
[Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the printer, and then select [Printer properties].
3. Select the [Configuration] tab, and then click [About].
4. Click [Fuji Xerox Web Site].
Your web browser launches and our web site is displayed.
5. Follow the instructions on the web site, and then download the desired software.
Note
• The URL of the download service page is as follows: http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/
• For the latest information about the software features, see the help of the software.

Updating the Printer's Firmware

Our web site also provides a program that allows you to update the printer's firmware (software embedded
within the printer) from your computer.
The latest firmware and updating program can be downloaded from the following URL:
http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/
Follow the instructions on the web site, and then download the desired firmware or updating program.
Note
• The communication fee shall be borne by users.

7 Troubleshooting 267
 Appendix

Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 269

Non-Genuine Mode.......................................................................................................... 276
Contacting Fuji Xerox ...................................................................................................... 277

268 User Guide

Specifications
Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Type Console
Memory Capacity 1 GB
Colour Capability Full color
Scan Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 1200 × 2400 dpi
Halftone/Printable Colors 256 tones/color (16.7 million colors)
Warm-Up Time 38 seconds or less (at 22°C room temperature)
Original Size The maximum size is 215.9 × 297 mm for both sheets and books.
Paper Size Max: Legal (8.5 x 14")
Min: A6, Monarch Envelope (3.9 x 7.5")
Image loss width: Top edge, 4 mm or less; bottom edge, 4 mm or less; left and
right edges, 4 mm or less
Paper Weight Paper Tray: 60 – 220 gsm
Bypass Tray: 60 – 220 gsm
Important
• The use of paper recommended by Fuji Xerox is suggested. Printing may not
be performed correctly depending on the conditions.

First Copy Output Time B/W: 9.9 seconds (for A4/monochrome mode)
Colour: 12.1 seconds (for A4/color mode)
Reduce/Enlarge Size-to-Size: 1:1 ± 1.3%
Preset: 50%, 70%, 81%, 100%, 122%, 141%, 200%
Variable: 25 – 400% (1% increments)
Continuous Copy Speed A4: 28.6 sheets/minute
Important
• The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.

Paper Tray Capacity Standard: 250 sheets x 1 tray + 50 sheets (Bypass Tray)
Optional: 550 sheets (Optional 550-Sheet Feeder)
Max: 850 sheets (Standard + Optional 550-Sheet Feeder)
Important
• When using 80 gsm paper

Continuous Copy 99 sheets

Important
• The machine may pause temporarily to perform image stabilization.

Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (A4)

Important
• When using 80 gsm paper

Appendix 269
 Power Supply AC 110 – 127 V ± 10%; 12 A; both 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz
AC 220 – 240 V ± 10%; 6 A; both 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz
Maximum Power AC 110 – 127 V / AC 220 – 240 V:
Consumption Maximum power consumption: 1320 W or less (110 V/220 V)
Low power mode: 23 W or less
Sleep mode: 1.5 W or less
Dimensions Width 420 x Depth 503 x Height 500 mm
Weight 30.2 kg
Important
• Consumables and accessories are not included.

Space Requirement Width 870 x Depth 1264 mm

(When the bypass tray is fully extended.)

Print Function
Type Built-in
Output Paper Size Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Continuous Print Speed Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Printing Resolution Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Page Description Language PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript 3 Compatible
Network Protocol Ethernet (standard): TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6, LPD, IPP, IPPS, SMB, Port9100, WSD*,
HTTP, HTTPS, RARP, AutoIP, WINS, Telnet), SNMP, DHCP, BOOTP, Bonjour
(mDNS), LDAP, LDAPS, Kerberos, DNS, SNTP, FTP
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n
* WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

270 User Guide

Operating System Standard: PCL6 driver
Windows® 10 (32bit)
Windows® 10 (64bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32bit)
Windows® 8.1 (64bit)
Windows® 7 (32bit)
Windows® 7 (64bit)
Windows Vista® (32bit)
Windows Vista® (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (32bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (64bit)

Standard: PostScript 3 Compatible

Windows® 10 (32bit)
Windows® 10 (64bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32bit)
Windows® 8.1 (64bit)
Windows® 7 (32bit)
Windows® 7 (64bit)
Windows Vista® (32bit)
Windows Vista® (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (32bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (64bit)
OS X 10.11 El Capitan
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
OS X 10.9 Mavericks
OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
Important
• For information about the latest supported OS, visit the Fuji Xerox web site.

Fonts Standard: PCL: 81 fonts and 36 symbol sets, PostScript 3 Compatible: 80 fonts
Important
• The verification with OCR-B or barcode scanner is required for OCR or barcode
reading. We recommend you to check the availability in advance.

Interface Standard: Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n

Scan Function
Type Color scanner

Appendix 271
 Original Size Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Scan Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi
Scan Speed Monochrome: 23 sheets/minute
Color: 11 sheets/minute
(600 dpi, Scan to SMB)
Important
• The scanning speed varies depending on documents.

Interface Same as the Print Function

Scan to PC: Network Protocol TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
Scan to PC: Operating System Windows® 10 (32bit)
Windows® 10 (64bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32bit)
Windows® 8.1 (64bit)
Windows® 7 (32bit)
Windows® 7 (64bit)
Windows Vista® (32bit)
Windows Vista® (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (32bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (64bit)
OS X 10.11 El Capitan
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
OS X 10.9 Mavericks
OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
Important
• For information about the latest supported OS, visit the Fuji Xerox web site.

Scan to PC: File Format Monochrome binary:

TIFF, PDF, XDW

Gray scale/Full color:

TIFF, JPEG, PDF, XDW
Scan to e-mail: Network TCP/IP (SMTP, POP3)
Protocol
Scan to e-mail: File Format Monochrome binary:
TIFF, PDF, XDW

Gray scale/Full color:

TIFF, JPEG, PDF, XDW

272 User Guide

Fax Function
Original Size Document glass: Maximum: A4/Letter
Automatic document feeder: Maximum: Legal
Recording Paper Size Maximum: Legal
Minimum: A4/Letter
Transmission Time 3 seconds
Important
• When transmitting an A4 size 700-character document in the standard quality
(8 × 3.85 lines/mm) and high speed mode (28.8 kbps or above: JBIG). This is
only the transmission speed for image information and does not include the
controlling time for the communication. Note that the actual transmission
time depends on the content of documents, the machine that the recipient
uses, and the status of the communication line.

Transmission Mode ITU-T Super G3/G3 ECM/G3

Scanning Resolution Standard : R8 × 3.85 line/mm
Fine: R8 × 7.7 line/mm
Super Fine (400 dpi): R16 × 15.4 line/mm
Coding Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Speed G3:33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4kbps
Applicable Lines Telephone subscriber line, PBX, Fax communication (PSTN), G3-1 port

Direct Fax Function

Original Size A1, A2, A3, 11x17", 11x15", 8K, B4, 10x11", Legal, Folio, Letter, A4, 16K,
Executive, JIS B5, C5, A5, 5x7", Com-10, A6, DL, 4x6", Monarch
Resolution Same as the Fax Function
Transmission Speed Same as the Fax Function
Applicable Lines Same as the Fax Function

Appendix 273
 Operating System Standard: PCL6 driver
Windows® 10 (32bit)
Windows® 10 (64bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32bit)
Windows® 8.1 (64bit)
Windows® 7 (32bit)
Windows® 7 (64bit)
Windows Vista® (32bit)
Windows Vista® (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (32bit)
Windows Server® 2008 (64bit)

Standard: Fax driver

OS X 10.11 El Capitan
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
OS X 10.9 Mavericks
OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
Important
• For information about the latest supported OS, visit the Fuji Xerox web site.

Duplex Function
Paper Size Maximum: Legal (8.5 × 14")
Minimum: 139.7 × 210 mm
Important
• For the custom size, you are required to specify the size.

Paper Weight 60 – 176 gsm

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

Type Duplex automatic document feeder
Original Size / Paper Weight Maximum: Legal (8.5 × 14")
Minimum: A5
Important
• For the custom size, minimum size is 139.7 x 139.7 mm.
60 – 220 gsm
Capacity 50 sheets
Important
• When using 80 gsm paper

274 User Guide

Feeding Speed Monochrome: 33 sheets/minute, Color: 14 sheets/minute (A4 1 sided)
Monochrome: 44 sheets/minute, Color: 12 sheets/minute (A4 2 sided)

Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

Paper Size Maximum: Legal, Minimum: A5
Custom size: 76.2 x 190.5 mm – 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Paper Weight 60 – 220 (gsm)
Feeding Capacity / Number of 550 sheets x One tray
Tray
Important
• When using 80 gsm paper

Dimensions Width 420 x Depth 465 x Height 123 mm

Weight 7 kg
Space Requirement (When Width 870 x Depth 1264 mm
connected to the main unit) (When tray1 is extended.)

Appendix 275
 Non-Genuine Mode
When you want to use the printer in the Non-Genuine mode, enable the Non-Genuine mode and replace the
toner cartridge.
Note
• If you use the printer in the Non-Genuine mode, the performance of the printer may not be at its optimum. Any
problems that may arise from the use of the Non-Genuine mode are not covered by our quality guarantee. The
continuous use of the Non-Genuine mode may also cause the printer to break down, and any repair charges for such
break down will be incurred by users.
• To disable the Non-Genuine mode, select [Disable] for [Non-Genuine Toner] on the operator panel.

1. Press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Device].

3. Tap [Maintenance] > [Non-Genuine Toner].

4. Select [Enable].
The printer switches to the Non-Genuine mode.

276 User Guide

Contacting Fuji Xerox
Technical Support Policy
Fuji Xerox recommends the Customer first utilize support materials shipped with the product, product
diagnostics, information contained on the web, and e-mail support. If unsuccessful, to obtain service under
product warranty the Customer must notify Fuji Xerox Telephone Support or its authorized service representative
of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period. Customer will provide appropriate assistance to
Telephone Support personnel to resolve issues, such as restoration of the operating system, software program
and drivers to their default configuration and settings, verification of functionality of Fuji Xerox supplied
products, replacement of customer replaceable units, clearing paper misfeeds and cleaning the unit and other
prescribed routine and preventative maintenance.
If the Customer's product contains features that enable Fuji Xerox or its authorized service representative to
diagnose and repair problems with the product remotely, Fuji Xerox may request that the Customer allow such
remote access to the product.

Online Services
You can find detail Product and Consumable warranty information on our web site at
http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/
Fuji Xerox Online Support Assistant provides instructions and troubleshooting guides to resolve your printer
problems. It is an easy-to-use, searchable online help. To find out more, please visit our online support at
http://www.fujixeroxprinters.com/

Appendix 277
DocuPrint CM315 z
User Guide ME7746E2-1 (Edition 1)
April 2016
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright© 2016 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.